JP6632415B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined prize in accordance with a display result of a variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified.

  As this type of slot machine, the AT is controlled by both the AT that informs the player of the pushing order that is advantageous to the player, and the RT that is controlled by the RT whose replay probability is higher than usual, and is controlled by the RT during the ART. There has been proposed a technique in which the number of ART continuations is increased at the time of winning a special replay that can be won only in a case (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2011-160844 A

  In the slot machine described in Patent Literature 1, even if a punk replay, which is an RT termination condition, is won during an ART, the termination of the RT can be avoided by performing an operation in accordance with the notified pressing order. However, if the player has operated in a different pressing order from the notified pressing order, the RT will end even if the continuation number of the ART remains. In this case, not only the RT ends, but also the special replay is not drawn by the end of the RT, so that an opportunity to increase the ART continuation number is lost. May be significantly increased.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine capable of preventing a profit of a player from being largely changed according to a lottery state.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, a slot machine of Means 1 of the present invention comprises:
A variable display section (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) each of which can be identified;
In the slot machine (slot machine 1) which derives a display result by stopping the variable display of the variable display units (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) and can win a prize according to the display result,
Lottery state control means capable of controlling to a plurality of types of lottery states including a first lottery state (RT2) and a second lottery state (RT0, RT1);
Lottery means (internal lottery) for determining a lottery result with a probability according to the type of lottery state,
Specific control execution means for executing specific control (additional state);
Specific control ending means for ending specific control (additional state);
With
The first lottery state (RT2) and the second lottery state (RT0, RT1) have different probabilities that the special lottery result (promotion replay) is determined.
In the specific control ending means, the specific control (additional state) is being executed, and in the first lottery state (RT2), the lottery result of the lottery means (internal lottery) becomes a special lottery result (promotion replay). Specific control (additional state) based on the
The slot machine (slot machine 1) has a special lottery result (promotion replay) with a probability that a special lottery result (promotion replay) is determined in at least the first lottery state (RT2) in the second lottery state (RT0, RT1). ) Is further provided with a re-lottery means (second lottery) for determining
The specific control ending means, when the specific control (additional state) is being executed and being controlled to the second lottery state (RT0, RT1), the lottery of the re-lottery means (second lottery). The specific control (additional state) is terminated based on the result of the special lottery result (promotion replay).
According to this feature, the specific control is executed, and in the first lottery state, the specific control is terminated based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means is a special lottery result. Although being executed, the special lottery result is determined in at least the first lottery state when the second lottery state is controlled to have a different probability of determining the special lottery result from the first lottery state. The specific control is terminated based on the fact that the special lottery result is determined by the re-lottery means in which the special lottery result is determined at a certain probability. Therefore, the state is controlled to the first lottery state or the second lottery It is possible to prevent the player's profit from greatly changing depending on whether or not the state is controlled.

  In the means 1, the first lottery state and the second lottery state have different probabilities that the special lottery result is determined. This means that the special lottery result is not only in the first lottery state but also in the second lottery state. The special lottery result may be determined by determining whether the special lottery result is determined and the probability of determining the special lottery result is different, or only one of the first lottery state and the second lottery state is the special lottery result. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the probabilities are different.

The slot machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is the slot machine according to the first aspect,
When the specific control (additional state) is being performed, a privilege granting unit capable of granting a privilege (the number of ART games) advantageous to the player is provided.
The re-lottery means (second lottery) determines a lottery result with a probability according to the first lottery state (RT2) in the second lottery state (RT0, RT1),
The first lottery state (RT2) and the second lottery state (RT0, RT1) have different probabilities that the specific lottery result (promotion replay) is determined.
The privilege granting means,
The specific control (additional state) is executed, and based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means (internal lottery) becomes the specific lottery result (promotional replay) in the first lottery state (RT2), the privilege ( ART games)
When the specific control (additional state) is being executed and the state is controlled to the second lottery state (RT0, RT1), the lottery result of the re-lottery means (second lottery) is changed to the specific lottery result (promotion). The feature (the number of ART games) is provided based on the fact that replay has been achieved.
According to this feature, the specific control is executed, and in the first lottery state, the privilege is given based on the fact that the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the specific lottery result. Although being executed, the first lottery state is controlled to a second lottery state having a different probability that the specific lottery result is determined. If the second lottery state is controlled, the lottery result is generated at a probability corresponding to the first lottery state. Since the privilege is given based on the determined lottery result of the re-lottery means being the specific lottery result, it is controlled to the first lottery state or to the second lottery state. , It is possible to prevent the profit of the player from greatly changing.

The slot machine according to the third aspect of the present invention is the slot machine according to the first or second aspect,
The re-lottery means (second lottery) determines a lottery result with a probability according to the first lottery state (RT2) in the second lottery state (RT0, RT1),
The re-lottery means (second lottery) determines the lottery result using a process (internal lottery process) common to the process used when the lottery means (lottery lottery) determines the lottery result. .
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the program capacity when making a determination by the re-lottery means.

The slot machine of means 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 3,
The first lottery state (RT2) and the second lottery state (RT0, RT1) have the same probability that a predetermined lottery result (small win, etc.) is determined,
The re-lottery means (second lottery) sets the second lottery state (RT0, RT1) regardless of whether or not the lottery result of the lottery means (lottery lottery) is a predetermined lottery result (such as a small role). When controlled, the lottery result is determined with a probability according to the first lottery state (RT2).
According to this feature, the re-lottery means determines whether or not the lottery result of the lottery means is a predetermined lottery result in which the probability of being determined does not change even in the first lottery state or the second lottery state. Regardless of whether the lottery result is determined according to the first lottery state, it is not necessary to consider the lottery result of the lottery means when making a determination by the re-lottery means in the second lottery state. It is possible to reduce the program capacity when making the determination by the means.

The slot machine according to the fifth aspect of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects,
When the re-lottery means (second lottery) determines a lottery result, a retreating means is provided for retreating (backing up) the lottery result by the lottery means (internal lottery) to a protection area (a predetermined area of the RAM 41c). And
According to this feature, when the re-lottery means determines the lottery result, it is possible to prevent the lottery result by the lottery means from being impaired.

The slot machine according to the sixth aspect of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects,
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated by the player when deriving a display result;
Derivation control means for deriving a display result;
With
In the first lottery state (RT2), when the lottery result of the lottery means (internal lottery) becomes a special lottery result (special result) in the first lottery state (RT2), the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated in a special operation mode (a timing at which the first ending combination can be stopped at the payline LN), a control for deriving a special display result (first ending combination) is performed, and a special operation is performed. Control is performed to derive a display result (second end combination) other than a special display result when operated in an operation mode other than the mode (a timing at which the first end combination cannot be stopped at the winning line LN). ,
In the first lottery state (RT2), when the lottery result of the lottery means (internal lottery) becomes a special lottery result (special result), the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated by a special operation. When operated in an aspect (a timing at which the first ending combination can be stopped at the payline LN), the specific control (additional state) ends in response to the fact that a special display result (the first ending combination) is derived. Is notified (additional state end notification production)
When the lottery result of the lottery means (internal lottery) becomes a special lottery result (special result) in the first lottery state (RT2), the derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated in a special operation mode. Is operated in an operation mode other than the above (when the first end combination cannot be stopped at the payline LN), a mode (end notification) different from that when a special display result (first end combination) is derived. In the mode 2), the end of the specific control (additional state) is notified,
In the second lottery state (RT0, RT1), when the lottery result of the re-lottery means (second lottery) becomes a special lottery result (special result), the lottery means (internal) in the first lottery state (RT2). When the lottery result of the lottery) becomes a special lottery result (special result), the deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operates in an operation mode other than the special operation mode (the first ending role is a winning line LN). The end of the specific control (additional state) is notified in a common mode (end notification mode 2) when the operation is performed at a timing that cannot be stopped.
According to this feature, when the lottery result of the re-lottery means becomes a special lottery result in the second lottery state, when the lottery result of the lottery means becomes the special lottery result in the first lottery state, the deriving operation means Is operated in an operation mode other than the special operation mode, that is, when the special display result is not derived, it is notified that the specific control is finished. Even when the specific control is terminated due to the special lottery result of the lottery means, the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced.

The slot machine of means 7 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 1 to 6,
The specific control (additional state) is a control in which a notification (navigation notification) according to a lottery result of the lottery means (internal lottery) is performed,
When the specific control (additional state) is being executed, notification (navigation notification) is performed depending on whether the state is the first lottery state (RT2) or the second lottery state (RT0, RT1). The feature is that the target lottery results are different.
According to this feature, when the specific control is being performed, the lottery result to be notified is different depending on whether the state is the first lottery state or the second lottery state. Whether the lottery state is the first lottery state or the second lottery state can be recognized.

  It should be noted that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the example to which the present invention is applied. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine. FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration of a main control unit. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a memory map of a ROM and a RAM mounted on a main control unit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing details of a memory map of a ROM and a RAM mounted on the main control unit. It is a figure showing the composition of a game program and a non-game program. It is a figure showing the relation between a game field and a non-game field. (A) is a flowchart showing a flow of processing when a non-game program is called from processing based on a game program during execution of the main processing, and (b) is based on the game program during execution of the timer interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of processing at the time of calling a non-game program from processing. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating an area of a RAM initialized by a main control unit when a first condition and a second condition are satisfied. (A) is a timing chart showing an output timing of a medal OUT signal and a security signal output from the main control unit to the external output board when an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game is detected, and (b) is a security signal. 9 is a timing chart showing a modification of the output timing of FIG. It is a figure for explaining the kind of special combination, the symbol combination of special combination, and the technical matter related to special combination. It is a figure for explaining a kind of a small combination, a symbol combination of a small combination, and a technical matter related to a small combination. It is a figure for explaining the kind of re-gaming, the combination of symbols of re-gaming, and technical matters related to re-gaming. It is a figure for explaining the symbol combination of a transition appearance, and a technical matter related to a transition appearance. It is a figure for explaining transition of a game state. It is a figure showing the outline of a game state. It is a figure for explaining the combination of the lottery target combination read as a lottery target combination for every game state. It is a figure for explaining the combination of the lottery target combination read as a lottery target combination for every game state. It is a figure for explaining the combination of the lottery target combination read as a lottery target combination for every game state. It is a figure for explaining the combination of the winning combination permitted by the lottery target combination. It is a figure for explaining the combination of the winning combination permitted by the lottery target combination. It is a figure for explaining reel control at the time of a plurality of small winning combinations. It is a figure for explaining reel control at the time of winning a plurality of re-games. It is a figure for explaining reel control at the time of winning a plurality of re-games. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the content of control relating to transition of a control state related to ART performed by a main control unit. It is a figure which shows the winning probability of the precursor period lottery performed by a main control part. It is a figure showing a control situation of a control state of a main control part, and a control situation of a production state of a sub control part. It is a figure for explaining a false precursor effect performed by a sub control part. It is a figure which shows the winning number and transmission number of the special combination in the 1st internal winning command transmitted by the main control unit. It is a figure showing the winning number and transmission number of the general combination and the replaying combination in the second internal winning command transmitted by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal winning command setting process which a main control part performs. It is a figure showing the navigation number in the push order command which a main control part transmits. 6 is a flowchart illustrating control contents of a pressing order command setting process performed by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the winning determination command setting processing which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the main lottery related process which a main control part performs. It is a flowchart which shows the control content of the internal lottery process which a main control part performs in a main lottery related process. It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the reel control which a main control part performs, and the effect which a sub-control part performs when replay GR21 and 22 win by internal lottery in 1st state (addition state and RT2). It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the reel control which a main control part performs, and the effect which a sub-control part performs when replay GR21 and 22 win by internal lottery in 1st state (addition state and RT2). It is a figure which shows the reel control which a main control part performs, and the execution mode of the effect which a sub-control part performs when a replay GR23 is won by internal lottery in 1st state (addition state and RT2). It is a figure which shows the execution mode of the reel control which a main control part performs, and the effect which a sub-control part performs when a promotion replay is won by an internal lottery in a 1st state (addition state and RT2). In the second state (added state and RT other than RT2), the reel control executed by the main control unit and the effect executed by the sub control unit when the replay GRs 21 and 22 are won by the second lottery are shown. FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a reel control executed by the main control unit and an execution mode of an effect executed by the sub-control unit when the replay GR23 is won in the second lottery in a second state (added state and RT other than RT2). is there. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a reel control executed by the main control unit and an effect executed by the sub-control unit when the promotion replay is won in the second lottery in the second state (the added state and RT other than RT2). is there. It is a figure for explaining the distribution method of the judgment value for every lottery target combination in each game state.

  Embodiments for implementing a slot machine according to the present invention will be described below based on embodiments.

  An embodiment of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 1, a slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a housing 1a having an open front surface and a side of the housing 1a. And a front door 1b pivotally supported at one end.

  As shown in FIG. 2, inside the housing 1a of the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, reels 2L, 2C, and 2R (hereinafter, left reel, middle reel, right reel) on which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. ) Are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, three continuous symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be seen from the see-through window 3 provided on the front door 1b. Are arranged as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 3, "red 7", "blue 7", "white 7", "BAR", "watermelon", "cherry a", and "cherry" are provided on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, respectively. A plurality of mutually identifiable patterns such as "b", "bell", "replay a", "replay b", and "plum" are drawn in a predetermined order, each of which is 21 pieces. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are displayed in upper, middle, lower, and upper tiers, respectively, in the see-through window 3 provided substantially at the center of the front door 1b.

  Each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is rotated by a correspondingly provided reel motor 32L, 32C, 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the design of each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is continuous with the see-through window 3. While the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped rotating, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the see-through window 3 as a display result.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, a reel sensor 33L, 33C, 33R for detecting a reference position and a reel LED 55 for irradiating the reels 2L, 2C, 2R from the back are provided for the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, respectively. , Are provided. The reel LED 55 includes twelve LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and can irradiate each symbol independently.

  A display area 51a of a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is arranged at a position on the front side (player side) of each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a liquid crystal panel having transparency when no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element. The liquid crystal display 51 is provided with a transparent region 51 b corresponding to the transparent window 3 of the display region 51 a and a transparent window 3. Each reel 2L, 2C, 2R can be visually recognized from the player side.

  In the front door 1b, as shown in FIG. 1, a medal insertion section 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout exit 9 from which medals are paid out, and a credit (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player). In this range, the maximum bet amount of the specified number of bets determined according to the game state within the range (3 is set as the specified number of RT0 to 4 described later and 2 is set as the specified number of RB in the present embodiment). MAXBET switch 6 which is operated when setting the medals, the medals stored as credits and the medals used for setting the bet amount are settled (the medals used for setting the credits and the bet amount are returned) ), A start switch 7 that is operated when starting a game, and a stop switch that is operated when each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R stops rotating. Pitch 8L, 8C, 8R, effect switch 56 to be used in effect are respectively provided so as to be operated by the player.

  In this embodiment, of the three reels 2L, 2C, and 2R that have started rotating, the reel that stops first is referred to as a first stop reel, and the stop is referred to as a first stop. Similarly, the reel that stops second is referred to as a second stop reel, the stop is referred to as a second stop, the reel that stops third is referred to as a third stop reel, and the stop is referred to as a third stop. Alternatively, it is referred to as a final stop.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door 1b displays a credit indicator 11 displaying the number of medals stored as credits, and shows the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize and the contents of the error when an error occurs. The game auxiliary display 12 displays an error code, information which can identify the reel stop order based on the navigation notification described later, etc., the 1 BET LED 14 for notifying that the bet number is set to 1, and the bet number is set to 2. 2 BET LED 15 for notifying that the game is on, 3 BET LED 16 for notifying that the bet amount has been set to 3 by light, insertion request LED 17 for notifying that a medal can be inserted, and a start switch 7 to operate the game. A start valid LED 18 for notifying that the start operation is valid by lighting, and a weight (previous game (A state in which the rotation of the reels is awaited because a certain period has not elapsed since the start.) A waiting LED 19 for notifying by light that the vehicle is being replayed and a replay LED 20 for notifying that a replay game is being performed is provided. Game display unit 13 is provided.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying by lighting that the setting operation of the bet amount by operating the MAXBET switch 6 is valid, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, Inside the 8R, left, middle, and right stop valid LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R (see FIG. 4) are provided to notify by light that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is valid. An effect LED 56a (see FIG. 4) is provided inside the effect switch 56 to notify by lighting that the operation of the effect switch 56 is effective.

  As shown in FIG. 2, inside the front door 1b, as shown in FIG. 2, a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a hit state described later by a predetermined key operation, and a change of a set value described later A set value display 24 on which the set value at that time is displayed during or while the set value is being checked. A hit control for controlling to a stop state (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed) at a predetermined timing. A hitting switch 36a for selecting the validity / invalidity of the stopping function, an automatic control for controlling the automatic payment processing (processing for paying out (returning) a medal stored as a credit regardless of a player's operation) at a predetermined timing. An automatic payment switch 36b for selecting the validity / invalidity of the payment function, and a flow path of the medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4 are connected to a hopper tank 34a (described later) provided inside the housing 1a. 2) A flow path switching solenoid 30 for selectively switching to either the medal payout exit 9 side or the medal payout exit 9 side, and an inserted medal sensor 31 for detecting medals which are inserted from the medal insertion section 4 and flow down to the hopper tank 34a side. A medal selector 29 having an insertion port sensor 26 for detecting insertion of a foreign substance on the upstream side of the insertion medal sensor 31 and a door open detection switch 25 (see FIG. 4) for detecting an open state of the front door 1b are provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4) and the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are respectively provided inside the housing 1a. A reel unit 2 including detectable reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal (see FIG. 4), and storing medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4. Hopper tank 34a, a hopper motor 34b (see FIG. 4) for paying out medals stored in the hopper tank 34a from the medal payout port 9, and a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b ( (See FIG. 4) and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a is provided. Inside the overflow tank 35, there is provided a full sensor 35a (see FIG. 4) for detecting that the stored medals are full.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front of the power supply box 100 functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, and normally functions as a reset switch for canceling an error state or a stopped state. In a setting change state, a reset / setting switch 38 functioning as a setting switch for changing a setting value of a winning probability (a payout rate) of an internal lottery described later, and a power supply operated when turning on / off the power supply A switch 39 is provided.

  The power supply box 100 is provided inside the housing 1a, and the front door 1b is provided on the front of the power supply box 100 because the front door 1b can be opened by a predetermined key operation held by a clerk or the like. The set key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power switch 39 can be operated only by a person such as a clerk having the key, and cannot be operated by the player. The same applies to the reset switch 23 detected by a predetermined key operation. In particular, since the setting key switch 37 requires further key operation after opening the front door 1b by key operation, only the clerk who has the key for operating the setting key switch 37 among the clerks at the game arcade. Operation is allowed.

  When playing a game in the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or the number of bets is set using credits. To use the credit, the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets set according to the game state is set, the pay line LN (see FIG. 1) becomes valid, and the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, that is, the game can be started. Become. In this embodiment, three bets are defined as a prescribed number of bets in RT0 to RT4 described later, and two are determined as a prescribed number of bets in RB described later. When the bet amount is set, the pay line LN is activated. When medals are inserted in more than the maximum number among the prescribed numbers corresponding to the gaming state, the medals are added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether the combination of the symbols displayed in the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a combination of the winning symbols. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, only the winning line LN set across the middle row of the reel 2L, the middle section of the reel 2C, and the middle section of the reel 2R, that is, the middle row, is a winning line. Stipulated. In this embodiment, only one winning line is applied, but a plurality of winning lines may be applied.

  Further, in this embodiment, in order to make it easy to recognize that the combination of the symbols constituting the prize is arranged in the prize line LN, the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are set separately from the prize line LN. The invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are not determined based on the combination of the symbols arranged on the invalid lines LM1 to LM4. When the combination of the symbols constituting the specific prize is arranged on the prize line LN, the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are invalid. When a combination of symbols (for example, bell-bell-bell) that becomes a winning when the winning line LN is aligned with any of the LM1 to LM4 is arranged, a symbol forming a specific winning on the winning line LN is formed. This is to make it easy to recognize that the combination is complete.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the upper line of the reel 2L, the upper line of the reel 2C, and the upper line of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM1 set over the symbols arranged in the upper direction in the horizontal direction, and the lower line of the reel 2L , The lower line of the reel 2C, the lower line of the reel 2R, that is, the invalid line LM2 set across the symbols arranged horizontally in the lower line, the upper line of the reel 2L, the middle line of the reel 2C, the lower line of the reel 2R, that is, the lower line. There are four types of invalid lines LM: an invalid line LM3 set across the symbols, a lower line of the reel 2L, a middle line of the reel 2C, and an upper line of the reel 2R, that is, an invalid line LM4 set across the symbols lined up to the right. It is defined as.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, “Bell-watermelon-cherry b”) determined as a combination in the winning line LN is completed, a prize is won and a predetermined symbol is formed. When the combination is complete, a symbol combination (for example, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”) that is an index that is easier to recognize than a predetermined symbol combination is arranged on one of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4, and the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 are invalidated. And a combination that can make it appear as if a prize has been won by a combination of symbols arranged in any of the above. Hereinafter, a combination of symbols that are aligned with any of the invalid lines LM1 to LM4 when a predetermined symbol combination is aligned with the pay line LN is referred to as a symbol combination as an index, and constitutes a symbol combination as an index. The design is called an index design.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, 2R rotate, and the symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R change continuously. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the see-through window 3.

  When one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter, also referred to as a combination) is displayed on each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R on the winning line LN. As a result, when the game stops, a prize is generated, and a predetermined number of medals are awarded to the player according to the prize and added to the credit. When the number of credits reaches the upper limit (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid directly from the medal payout port 9 (see FIG. 1). Further, when a combination of symbols accompanied by a transition of the gaming state is stopped on the pay line LN as a result of displaying the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the game state is shifted to a gaming state corresponding to the combination of the symbols. .

  In this embodiment, the game starts when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected in a state where the operation of the start switch 7 is valid, and ends when all the reels stop. One unit of control (game control) for executing the game is started when all controls accompanying the end of the previous game are completed, and when all controls accompanying the end of the game are completed. finish.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration using three reels is illustrated, but a configuration using only one reel, a configuration using two reels, and a configuration using four or more reels may be used. In a configuration using two or more reels, the winning may be determined based on a combination of display results derived for all of the two or more reels. Further, in this embodiment, the variable display device is constituted by physical reels, but the variable display device may be constituted by an image display device such as a liquid crystal display.

  Further, in the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, after the game is started and the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are rotated and the symbols start to change, one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated. Then, the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R is stopped, and the symbol is stopped and displayed. The maximum stop delay time from the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is 190 ms (millisecond).

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate 80 times per minute, and change 80 × 21 (the number of symbols per reel) = 1,680 symbols, so that a maximum of four symbols are drawn during 190 ms. You can do it. That is, the symbols that can be selected as the stop symbols are the symbols displayed when the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are operated, and the symbols four frames away from the symbols, for a total of five symbols.

  Therefore, for example, when one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is operated and the symbol displayed on the lower row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is set as a reference, the symbol from the symbol to four frames ahead is displayed. Since the symbol can be displayed in the lower row, when one of the stop switches 8L, 8R is operated on each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the symbol displayed in the middle row of the reel corresponding to the stop switch is operated. Can be displayed on the winning line, including symbols arranged within five frames.

  Hereinafter, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R may be simply referred to as reels unless it is particularly necessary to distinguish them. The reel 2L may be referred to as a left reel, the reel 2C may be referred to as a middle reel, and the reel 2R may be referred to as a right reel. An operation of stopping the reels 2L, 2C, 2R by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R may be referred to as a stop operation.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. Is produced, and a drive power supply for the electric components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated by the power supply board 101 and supplied to each unit.

  A power supply of AC 100 V is supplied to the power supply board 101 from the outside, and a DC voltage required for driving the electric components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated from the power supply of AC 100 V, and the game control board 40 and the production control board 90. It is supplied to. The hopper motor 34b, the payout sensor 34c, the full tank sensor 35a, the setting key switch 37, the reset / setting switch 38, and the power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101.

  On the game control board 40, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the stop switch 36a, the automatic settlement switch 36b, the inserted medal sensor 31, and the door opening are provided. The detection switch 25, the reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the payout sensor 34c, the full tank sensor 35a, the setting key switch 37, and the reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. The detection signals of these connected switches are input. In addition, the game control board 40 includes the above-described credit indicator 11, game assist indicators 12, 1-3 BET LEDs 14-16, insertion request LED 17, start valid LED 18, waiting LED 19, replay LED 20, BET switch valid LED 21, , Middle and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, 22R, a set value display 24, a flow path switching solenoid 30, and reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and the hopper motor 34b described above via the power supply board 101. These electric components are connected and driven based on the control of a main control unit 41 described later mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 performs a process relating to the progress of the game and also directly or indirectly controls each part of a control circuit mounted on the game control board 40, and an oscillation signal of a predetermined frequency. A control clock generation circuit for generating a control clock CCLK; a random number clock generation circuit 43 for generating a random number clock RCLK which is an oscillation signal having a predetermined frequency different from the oscillation frequency of the control clock CCLK; A switch detection circuit 44 that takes in a detection signal input from switches connected directly to or via a power supply board 101 and transmits the signal to a main control unit 41, and a motor drive signal (stepping) output from the main control unit 41. Motor drive circuit 45 for transmitting the motor phase signals) to the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. A solenoid drive circuit 46 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal output from the main control unit 41 to the flow path switching solenoid 30; and various displays connected to the game control board 40 using an LED drive signal output from the main control unit 41. When the voltage of the power supply supplied to the slot machine 1 is detected by monitoring the voltage of the power supply supplied to the slot machine 1, a voltage drop signal indicating the fact is output to the main control unit 41. And a reset circuit 49 that supplies a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 when the power supply is unstable such as when the power is turned on or when the power is turned off.

  FIG. 5 shows a configuration example of the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board 40. The main control unit 41 is a one-chip microcomputer, and includes an external bus interface 501, a clock circuit 502, a verification block 503, a unique information storage circuit 504, an arithmetic circuit 505, a reset / interrupt controller 506, CPU (Central Processing Unit) 41a, ROM (Read Only Memory) 41b, RAM (Random Access Memory) 41c, free-run counter circuit 507, random number circuits 508a and 508b, timer circuit 509, interrupt controller 510 , A parallel input port 511, a serial communication circuit 512, a parallel output port 513, and an address decode circuit 514.

  The reset / interrupt controller 506 controls various reset and interrupt requests generated inside and outside the main control unit 41. The reset / interruption controller 506 includes an out-of-designation area prohibition (IAT) circuit 506a and a watchdog timer (WDT) 506b. The IAT circuit 506a is a circuit for monitoring whether or not the user program is correctly executed in the designated area, and has a function of outputting an IAT generation signal when detecting that the user program has been executed outside the designated area. The watchdog timer 506b has a function of generating a timeout signal every set period.

  The external bus interface 501 is a bus interface having an interface function between an external bus and an internal bus of a chip constituting the main control unit 41, an address bus, a data bus, and a direction control function of each control signal. The clock circuit 502 is a circuit that generates the internal system clock SCLK by dividing the control clock CCLK by two or the like. The verification block 503 has a function of connecting to an external verification machine and verifying a chip. The unique information storage circuit 504 is a circuit that stores a plurality of types of unique information serving as internal information of the main control unit 41. The arithmetic circuit 505 is a circuit that performs multiplication and division.

  The CPU 41a is a control CPU that executes a game control in the slot machine 1 by executing a user program (a game control processing program for game control) based on the control code read from the ROM 41b. When such game control is executed, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU 41a reads fixed data from the ROM 41b, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 41a writes various variable data in the RAM 41c and temporarily stores the same, and the CPU 41a is temporarily stored in the RAM 41c. A variable data reading operation for reading various kinds of variable data, a reception operation in which the CPU 41a receives an input of various signals from outside the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, the parallel input port 511, the serial communication circuit 512, and the like; A transmission operation of outputting various signals to the outside of the main control unit 41 via the external bus interface 501, the serial communication circuit 512, the parallel output port 513, and the like is also performed.

  The ROM 41b stores a control code indicating a user program (a game control processing program for game control), fixed data, and the like. The RAM 41c provides a work area for game control and the like. Here, at least a part of the RAM 41c may be a backup RAM backed up by a backup power supply. That is, even if the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped, at least a part of the contents of the RAM 41c is stored for a predetermined period.

  As the free-run counter circuit 507, an 8-bit free-run counter is mounted. The random number circuits 508a and 508b are circuits that generate numerical data such as an 8-bit random number and a 16-bit random number, which are random numbers having a predetermined update range. In this embodiment, the hardware random number generated by the 16-bit random number circuit 508b among the random number circuits 508a and 508b is used as a random number for an internal lottery described later. The timer circuit 509 is a 16-bit programmable timer, counts down the set timer value based on the input of the control clock CCLK, and outputs an interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller when the timer value reaches 0000H. In this embodiment, it is possible to perform a periodic interrupt request and time measurement using the timer circuit 509.

  The interrupt controller 510 is a circuit that controls an external interrupt request from an interrupt terminal and an internal peripheral circuit (for example, a serial communication circuit 512, random number circuits 508a and 508b, and a timer circuit 509). . The parallel input port 511 includes an input-only port having a width of 8 bits. The parallel output port 513 provided in the main control unit 41 shown in FIG. 4 includes an output-only port having an 11-bit width. The serial communication circuit 512 is a circuit that performs asynchronous serial communication in input / output to / from the outside.

  The address decode circuit 514 is a circuit for decoding each functional block inside the main control unit 41 and decoding a chip select signal which is a decode signal for an external device. The chip select signal allows the internal circuit of the main control unit 41 or an external device serving as a peripheral device to selectively operate effectively, thereby enabling access from the CPU 41a.

  For example, when the main control unit 41 accesses an area of the storage area of the ROM 41b in which a program or the like is not stored, or accesses an area of the storage area of the RAM 41c for which access prohibition is set. That is, by causing an illegal access reset when an access is made to a memory area that is not accessed in a normal operation, the progress of the game is disabled. Even if an unauthorized program is stored in an area unrelated to the above, an unused area of the RAM 41c, or the like, the execution of the unauthorized program can be prevented.

  The main control unit 41 is activated by the occurrence of an internal or external reset. At this time, the main control unit 41 assigns a value set in a vector table assigned to the ROM 41b and set to the start address of the interrupt processing. Is a value indicating unused or a value indicating an area where a program or the like is actually stored. It is possible to prevent in advance that an unintended process is executed due to occurrence or the like.

  The main control unit 41 transmits various commands to the sub control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513. The command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 is transmitted in only one direction, and the command is not transmitted from the sub control unit 91 to the main control unit 41. In the present embodiment, the command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 via the parallel output port 513, that is, the command is transmitted as a parallel signal. A configuration for transmitting a command to the sub-control unit 91, that is, a configuration for transmitting the command as a serial signal may be employed.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 receives detection states of various switches connected to the game control board 40 from the parallel input port 511. Then, the main control unit 41 executes a main process that shifts stepwise according to the detection state of various switches input from the parallel input port 511. In addition, the main control unit 41 can execute the interrupt process by interrupting the main process when an interrupt occurs. In the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed when a timeout has occurred in the timer circuit 509, that is, at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in the present embodiment). In addition, the main control unit 41 is set to automatically prohibit other interrupts during execution of the interrupt processing, and when a plurality of interrupts occur simultaneously, a predetermined order is set. Has been set to execute priority. Note that if another interrupt factor occurs during execution of the interrupt processing and the interrupt factor continues even after the interrupt processing ends, the interrupt is terminated at the end of the interrupt processing. The prohibition is automatically released, at which point a new interrupt occurs. It should be noted that other interrupts are set to be automatically prohibited during execution of the interrupt processing, and the interrupt prohibition is not automatically released when the interrupt processing is completed. At the start, another interrupt may be prohibited by a program, and at the end of the interrupt processing, the prohibition of the interrupt may be released by the program.

  The main control unit 41 repeatedly performs a process according to the control state as a main process until the detection state of various switches connected to the game control board 40 changes, and responds to the change in the detection state of various switches. Execute the process of shifting in stages. In addition, the main control unit 41 executes the timer interrupt processing (main) at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in the present embodiment). Note that the execution interval of the timer interrupt processing (main) is set to a time longer than the sum of the time during which the processing repeated in the main processing repeats according to the control state and the execution time of the timer interrupt processing (main). Thus, at least one cycle of the process repeated according to the control state between the current and next timer interrupt processes (main) is performed at least.

  The effect switch 56 is connected to the effect control board 90, and a detection signal of the effect switch 56 is input. In addition, effect devices such as a liquid crystal display 51, effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, reel LED 55, and the like are connected, and these effect devices are controlled by a sub-control unit 91 described later mounted on an effect control board 90. It is driven based on this.

  In this embodiment, the sub-control unit 91 mounted on the effect control board 90 controls the output of the effect devices such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55. However, an output control unit that directly performs output control of the effect device separately from the sub-control unit 91 is mounted on the effect control board 90 or another board, and the sub-control unit 91 is based on a command from the main control unit 41. The output pattern of the rendering device may be determined, and the output control unit may control the output of the rendering device based on the output pattern determined by the sub-control unit 91. In such a configuration, the sub-control unit 91 and the output control The output control of the rendering device is performed by both of the units. Further, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 are illustrated as the effect devices, but the effect device is not limited to these, and for example, a display that is driven mechanically. A device or a mechanically driven role object may be applied as the rendering device.

  The effect control board 90 is composed of a microcomputer having a sub CPU 91a, a ROM 91b, a RAM 91c, and an I / O port 91d, and controls the effect, and a liquid crystal display 51 connected to the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 for performing display control, an effect effect LED 52, LED drive circuits 93a to 93e for controlling drive of the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 for performing audio output control from the speakers 53 and 54, and power-on. Reset circuit 95 that supplies a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the initialization command is not input for a certain period of time or when the initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not input, and a switch detection circuit that detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the effect control board 90 96 and a clock device 9 for outputting time information including date information and time information The power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, a power cutoff detection circuit 98 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating the voltage drop to the sub CPU 91a, and other circuits. Is installed.

  The sub CPU 91 a receives a command transmitted from the game control board 40, performs various controls for performing an effect according to an effect control program or the like stored in the ROM 91 b, and is mounted on the effect control board 90. Each part of the control circuit is controlled directly or indirectly.

  In the reset circuit 95, the voltage at which the reset signal is released is set lower than that of the reset circuit 49 that supplies a system reset signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. It is designed to be started earlier than the section 41. On the other hand, in the power interruption detection circuit 98, the voltage at which the voltage drop signal is output is set to be lower than that of the power interruption detection circuit 48 which outputs the voltage drop signal to the main control unit 41 in the game control board 40. In, the sub-control unit 91 detects a power failure at a later stage than the main control unit 41, and performs a power interruption process (sub) described later.

  The sub-control unit 91 has an interrupt function similarly to the main control unit 41, generates an interrupt when receiving a command from the main control unit 41, and acquires the command transmitted from the main control unit 41. , Execute the command reception interrupt processing stored in the buffer. Further, the sub-control unit 91 generates an interrupt every time the number of input system clocks reaches a certain number, that is, at certain time intervals (about 2 ms), and executes a timer interrupt process (sub) described later. Further, unlike the main control unit 41, when an interrupt occurs based on the reception of a command, the sub-control unit 91 interrupts the timer interrupt process (sub) even during execution of the process. , A command reception interrupt process is executed, and even if interrupts that trigger the timer interrupt process (sub) occur simultaneously, the command reception interrupt process is executed with the highest priority. The backup power is also supplied to the sub-control unit 91 at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is retained while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout rate of medals changes according to the set value. More specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability according to a set value in a lottery that affects the degree of advantage to a player, such as an internal lottery, a navigation stock lottery, and an additional lottery described later. The set value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate and the payout rate decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 37. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the power is turned on, the setting value read from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24 as a display value, and the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38. Move to change state. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change state, the display value displayed on the set value display 24 is updated by one (when further operated from the set value 6, the set value is changed to 1). Return). Then, when the start switch 7 is operated, the display value is determined as the set value. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the determined display value (set value) is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41, and the state shifts to a state where the game can proceed.

  When the power is turned on while the setting key switch 37 is turned on, the configuration may be changed to the setting change state on condition that the door opening detection switch 25 detects that the front door 1b is opened. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting from being illegally changed while the front door 1b is not opened. Further, in a configuration in which the state is changed to the setting change state on condition that the detection corresponding to the opening of the front door 1b is performed, the door opening detection switch 25 is used to respond to the opening of the front door 1b after shifting to the setting change state. It is preferable that the setting change state is maintained even if the detection of the change is not performed. Therefore, even if the front door 1b is temporarily closed during the setting change, the operation for shifting to the setting change state again is performed. It is not necessary, and the setting change operation does not become complicated. Further, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off after the start switch 7 is operated and the set value is determined after shifting to the setting change state, the door opening detection switch 25 detects the opening corresponding to the opening of the front door 1b. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the setting change state is ended and the game can proceed to a possible state, provided that the front door 1b is not opened even in such a configuration. It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed.

  In order to confirm the set value, after the game is over, the setting key switch 37 may be turned on in a state where the bet amount is not set. When the setting key switch 37 is turned on in such a situation, the setting value read out from the RAM 41c is displayed on the setting value display 24, thereby shifting to a setting check state in which the setting value can be checked. In the setting confirmation state, the progress of the game is not possible, and by setting the setting key switch 37 to the off state, the setting confirmation state ends, and the game returns to a state in which the game can proceed.

  After the game, when the setting key switch 37 is turned on in a state where the bet amount is not set, the door opening detection switch 25 must detect that the front door 1b has been opened. Alternatively, the configuration may be changed to a setting confirmation state. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a setting value from being illegally confirmed in a state where the front door 1b is not opened. Further, in a configuration in which the state is shifted to the setting confirmation state on condition that the detection corresponding to the opening of the front door 1b is performed, the door opening detection switch 25 responds to the opening of the front door 1b after shifting to the setting confirmation state. It is preferable that the setting confirmation state be maintained even if the detection of the setting is not detected. Therefore, even if the front door 1b is temporarily closed during the setting confirmation, the operation for shifting to the setting confirmation state again is performed. It is not necessary, and the setting confirmation operation does not become complicated. When the setting key switch 37 is turned off after the start switch 7 is operated and the set value is determined after shifting to the setting confirmation state, the door opening detection switch 25 detects the opening corresponding to the opening of the front door 1b. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the setting confirmation state is terminated and the game can be advanced to a state in which the game can be advanced, provided that the front door 1b is not opened even in such a configuration. It is possible to prevent the setting value from being confirmed.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 is detected every time the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed. When the determination process is performed and it is determined that the voltage drop signal is detected in the power failure determination process, the power interruption process (main) for setting data for determining whether the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the next recovery is performed. Execute.

  Then, the main control unit 41 returns the processing state of the main control unit 41 to the state before the power failure based on the data stored in the RAM 41c on condition that the data in the RAM 41c is normal at the time of activation. However, if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the RAM abnormal error code is set in the register, the state is controlled to the RAM abnormal error state, and the progress of the game is disabled.

  The error state is a normal error state that is released by a reset operation (operation of the reset / setting switch 38 or the reset switch 23), and the state is changed to the above-described setting change state and is released until a new set value is set. There is no special error state, and the RAM abnormal error state is a special error state. Once controlled to the RAM abnormal error state, the state shifts to the setting change state and is released until a new set value is set Never be.

  The sub-control unit 91 also determines whether or not the voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98 has been detected in the timer interrupt processing (sub), and when it is determined that the voltage drop signal has been detected, At the next recovery, a power interruption process (sub) for setting data for determining whether the data in the RAM 91c is normal is executed.

  Then, the sub-control unit 91 returns the processing state of the sub-control unit 91 to the state before the power interruption based on the data stored in the RAM 91c, on condition that the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of activation. However, if the data in the RAM 91c is not normal, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, and the RAM 91c is initialized. In this case, unlike the main control unit 41, the execution of the effect is not disabled only by initializing the RAM 91c.

  Further, even when it is determined that the data in the RAM 91c is normal at the time of the startup, the sub-control unit 91 receives the setting command described later indicating that the state has shifted to the setting change state from the main control unit 41. The RAM 91c is also initialized when neither the later-described return command nor the setting command indicating that the control state of the main control unit 41 has returned after a certain period of time has elapsed. Also in this case, the execution of the effect is not disabled only by initializing the RAM 91c.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The usable area of the storage area of the RAM 41c is divided into a game RAM area, an unused area 4, and a non-game RAM area (see FIG. 7B). The game RAM area is further divided into a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack area. The special work is a work in which data that is not initialized even when the set value is changed is stored, and stores software random numbers, set values, data indicating a game state, and the like. The important work is a work in which data which is inconvenient when initialized at the end of a specific game state (RB, BB) is stored, and data for LED display, input / output data of an input port, an output port, and a game time. A clock counter and the like are stored. The general work is a work in which data that can be initialized at the end of a specific gaming state is stored, and stores a stopped symbol, the number of paid out medals, and the like. The unused area 3 is a work that is not used in any program. The game stack area is an area in which data saved from a register of the main control unit 41 during execution of a game program described later is stored.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines that the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed when the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed when the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the five initialization conditions, namely, when the game is not destroyed, when the setting change state is ended, when a specific game state (RB, BB) is ended, and when one game is ended, each initial state is satisfied. Five types of initialization with different areas to be initialized are performed according to the initialization conditions.

  Initialization 0 is initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 is turned on and data in the RAM 41c is destroyed, and in initialization 0, all available areas are initialized. . Initialization 1 is initialization performed when the setting key switch 37 is turned on and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of startup. In initialization 1, the area other than the special work in the game RAM area is All areas of the game RAM area are initialized. The initialization 2 is an initialization performed after the setting change state is ended by the startup with the setting key switch 37 being ON. In the initialization 2, the special work and the game stack area (in use) in the game RAM area are used. Areas other than () are initialized. The initialization 3 is an initialization performed at the end of a specific game state. In the initialization 3, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area are initialized. The initialization 4 is an initialization performed at the end of one game. In the initialization 4, the unused area 3 of the game RAM area and the game stack area (unused) are initialized. The storage area for the set value and the data indicating the gaming state is allocated to the special work, and when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed at the time of startup with the setting key switch 37 being ON, ie, the data in the RAM 41c If the setting is changed normally, the data indicating the set value and the game state will be held. A storage area for a timer counter, which will be described later, is allocated to important work, and is held without being initialized at the end of a game or at the end of a specific game state.

  Further, when performing the above-described initialization, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment specifies the start address and the end address as the RAM addresses to be initialized, so that one byte from the specified start address is obtained. After overwriting the data of 0 with 0, the logical sum of the 1-byte data is calculated, and if the calculation result is 0, the process of moving to the next address is repeated until the designated end address is reached. Then, the RAM area in the range of the designated address is initialized.

  When the main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment is activated by the occurrence of a reset, the main control unit 41 performs a startup setting. In the setting at the time of starting, the status flag provided in the main control unit 41 is initialized. The status flag is data that holds the state of the operation result or execution result of the instruction, and particularly includes an interrupt master permission flag for setting the inhibition / permission of the interrupt. Since the initial value of the interrupt master permission flag is a value indicating that the interrupt is prohibited, the main control unit 41 starts up in a state where the interrupt is prohibited. After that, after setting various functions with reference to HW parameters to be described later, according to the program stored in the program / data area, when a reset occurs, the apparatus is started in an interrupt prohibited state, and then executed first. Start the initial setting process.

  In the initial setting process, the main control unit 41 first sets the interrupt to be prohibited, determines whether the setting key switch 37 is ON at the time of startup, and determines whether the setting key switch 37 is ON at the time of startup. If it is determined that the state is the state, the process proceeds to the setting change process, and the RAM 41c is initialized at the start of the setting change process. At this time, if the data in the RAM 41c is normal, the special work is retained and other areas are initialized, so that even after the setting is changed, a part of the control state (setting value, game state, etc.) before the change is changed. On the other hand, if the data in the RAM 41c is not normal while the data can be held, the abnormalities in the data in the RAM 41c can be surely resolved by initializing all the usable areas including the special work. It has become.

  After the RAM 41c is initialized, the interrupt is set to be enabled, and the set value is updated one by one every time the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and after the ON of the start switch 7 is detected, The setting value when the setting key switch 37 is turned on is stored in the RAM 41c, and the setting change process is terminated.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 starts up with the interrupt master permission flag set to the initial value indicating that the interrupt is prohibited, and starts in the state in which the interrupt is prohibited. After the interrupt is set to be prohibited, the subsequent initial setting process is executed, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an unintended interrupt.

  Further, after the end of the setting change process, the main control unit 41 executes a main process of performing a process stepwise according to the progress of the game for each game unit. In the main process, the RAM 41c is initialized for each game unit, and the RAM 41c is also initialized at the end of the setting change process. Then, after the setting change processing is completed, the main processing is started from the stage before the processing of initializing the RAM 41c in the main processing, and the initialization of the RAM 41c after the completion of the setting change processing and the game unit The initialization of each RAM 41c can be performed by a common process.

  In the setting change process and the main process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment initializes a predetermined region of the RAM 41c by executing a game region initialization process. In the game area initialization processing, by specifying the start address and end address of the initialization target RAM, the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated, and the capacity of the initialization target RAM is calculated from the start address of the initialization target RAM. The designated area of the initialization target RAM in the game RAM area is initialized by sequentially clearing the area of the minute.

  By specifying the start address and end address of the RAM to be initialized, the start address is set as the initial value of the specified address, and the process of updating the specified address to the next address after clearing the data of the specified address is performed. By repeatedly executing until the designated address becomes the end address, a region from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM may be initialized.

  In the non-game area initialization processing of the present embodiment, the RAM area for the capacity of the initialization target RAM is sequentially cleared from the start address of the initialization target RAM (the start address of the unused area 4), whereby the RAM to be initialized is initialized. , The area from the start address to the end address, that is, the unused area 4 and the non-game RAM area are initialized.

  By specifying the start address and end address of the RAM to be initialized, the start address is set as the initial value of the specified address, and the process of updating the specified address to the next address after clearing the data of the specified address is performed. By repeatedly executing until the designated address becomes the end address, a region from the start address to the end address of the initialization target RAM may be initialized.

  In the non-game area initialization process of the present embodiment, the start address of the unused area 4 is set as the start address of the initialization target RAM, so that the entire unused area 4 and the non-game RAM area are initialized. The non-game area initialization process may be any configuration as long as at least a part of the non-game RAM area is initialized, and initializes a part of the non-game RAM area. However, a part of the non-game RAM area and the unused area 4 may be initialized.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the game area initialization processing and the non-game area initialization processing, the 1-byte data stored at the designated address is overwritten with 0 and cleared, and thereafter, the logic of the 1-byte data is cleared. The sum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculation result is 0. If the calculation result is not 0, the processing of overwriting and clearing the 1-byte data with 0 again is performed, thereby obtaining the address of the corresponding address. Although the configuration is such that data is cleared, a configuration in which 1-byte data stored at a specified address is overwritten with 0 and cleared is also possible.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a prescribed number of bets (3 in the case of RT0 to 4 and 2 in the case of RB) that can be set according to the gaming state (RT0 to RT4, RB) is determined. Therefore, the game can be started on the condition that a predetermined number of bets determined according to the game state is set. In the present embodiment, the pay line LN is activated when a prescribed number of bets is set according to the gaming state.

  In this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in this embodiment, all the pay lines are always activated. A winning combination is achieved when a combination of symbols called combinations is arranged on the winning line that has been formed (hereinafter, simply referred to as a winning line). The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols.

  The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into small winning combinations with medal payout and re-starting so that the next game can be started without setting the number of bets. There are a gaming role and a special role accompanied by a transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player. Hereinafter, the small role and the replaying role are also collectively referred to as a general role. In order for the winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win the internal lottery described later and set the winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c. Note that among the winning flags of these roles, the winning flags of the small role and the replaying role are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game. The combination is enabled until the combination of the permitted combinations is completed by the flag, and is invalid in the game in which the combination of the permitted combinations is completed. That is, once the special combination winning flag is won, even if the combination of combinations permitted by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. Becomes

  Next, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not to permit winning of each of the above-mentioned roles before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived (specifically, the start switch 7). At the time of detection). In the internal lottery, first, when the start switch 7 is detected, a random number for the internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535) is obtained. Specifically, the value generated by the random number circuit 508b and stored in the random number value register of the random number circuit 508b is set in the lottery work assigned to the RAM 41c. Then, for each combination determined according to the gaming state (RT0-4, RB), numerical data stored in the lottery work, and each combination determined according to the current gaming state, the number of bets, and the set value. It is determined whether or not a winning is permitted according to the number of determination values of.

  In the internal lottery, the number of determination values determined according to the role to be subjected to the internal lottery, the current game state and the set value are sequentially changed to the random number value for the internal lottery (numerical data stored in the lottery work). If the result of the addition overflows, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For this reason, the winning combination is determined based on the probability (the number of judgment values / 65536) according to the magnitude of the number of judgment values.

  Then, the winning number indicating the result of the internal lottery is set in the RAM 41c. The winning number is used for setting an internal winning flag, notifying the navigation, creating a command, controlling stop of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, and the like.

  If the winning of any of the winning combinations is determined, the winning flag corresponding to the winning determined for the winning number is set in the internal winning flag storing work assigned to the RAM 41c based on the winning number. The internal winning flag storage work is composed of a 2-byte storage area, of which the upper byte is assigned as a special role storing work in which the special role winning flag is set, and the lower byte is a general role winning work. Assigned as a general role storage work for which the flag is set. Specifically, when the special role is won, the special role winning flag indicating that the special role has been won is set in the special role storing work, and when the general role is won, the general role is won. The winning flag of the general combination indicating the effect is set in the general combination storage work. If no winning combination or combination of winning combinations is won, the special combination storing work and the general combination storing work are cleared.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described. When the rotation of the reels starts, and when the reels are stopped and the reels that are still spinning remain, the main control unit 41 determines the winning number and the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b. By referring to the table, a stop control table is created for each rotating reel. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R corresponding to the spinning reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to, and the slippage of the stop control table referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding frames, and it is possible to stop the reel by drawing up to four symbols after detecting the stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be specified from a range of up to five frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. Further, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to draw up to four symbols and stop the reel after detecting the stop operation. The stop position of the symbol can be designated from a maximum of five symbols including the operation position.

  In the present embodiment, if any one of the winning combinations is won, when the stop operation is performed, the winning combinations within the pull-in range of a maximum of four frames can be aligned and stopped on the pay line. If possible, a control is performed to stop the rolls in a uniform manner, and for the winning combination, a control is performed to stop the rolls without aligning them in the pull-in range of a maximum of four frames. When the special role and the small role are elected at the same time, such as when the small role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, when the stop operation is performed, the maximum If it is possible to stop all the winning combinations in the 4-frame pull-in range, control is performed to align and stop the winning small roles. If it is not possible to draw in, if it is possible to stop all the special roles that have been won in the pay-in range of a maximum of four frames on the winning line, control will be performed to align and stop them. That is, control is performed to stop the four frames without being aligned in the pull-in range. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the small role on the pay line is given priority over the special role, and the special role can be won only when the small role cannot be drawn. When the special role and the small role can be drawn in at the same time, only the small role is drawn in, and the small role and the special role are not aligned on the winning line at the same time. In addition, when the special role and the small role are elected at the same time, the control to arrange the special role on the winning line has priority over the small role, and only when the special role cannot be drawn, the small role is placed on the winning line. Alignment control may be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the special role and the replaying role are simultaneously won, for example, when the replaying role is won while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, a stop operation is performed. At this time, a control is performed in which the symbols of the replaying game are aligned and stopped within a pull-in range of a maximum of four frames on the winning line. In this case, the symbols constituting the replaying game or the symbols forming the replaying game simultaneously won are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, at intervals of 4 frames or less on any of the reels 2L, 2C and 2R. Since the stop can be stopped at an arbitrary position within the pull-in range of 4 frames, if the special role and the replaying role are simultaneously won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R by the player. Instead, the re-game players will always win. In other words, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-gaming combination on the winning line is given priority over the special combination, and the re-gaming combination always wins. When the special role and the replaying role can be drawn in at the same time, only the replaying role is drawn in and the special role does not coincide with the replaying role on the winning line.

  In this embodiment, the reel stop control is performed by using the stop control table that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing at which the stop operation is performed. A configuration in which the stop position is specified from the table and stop control for stopping the reel at the specified stop position is performed.The stop position that can be stopped at the timing of the stop operation is searched without using the stop control table or the stop position table. Specified and configured to perform stop control to stop the reel at the specified stop position, stop control using stop control table, stop control using stop position table, stop possible without using stop control table or stop position table A configuration in which stop control by searching and specifying a stop position is used together, and a configuration in which stop control is performed by partially changing the stop control table and stop position table It may be.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 counts the game time, which is the time that has elapsed since the start of the game, each time the reel rotation is started, that is, the time elapsed from the start of the reel rotation. After the end of one game, when a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals or the like and the game start operation is performed in a state where the game start operation is enabled, the reel rotation of the previous game is started. If the game time from which the timing was started is equal to or longer than the specified time (4.1 seconds in this embodiment), that is, if the specified time has elapsed since the start of reel rotation of the previous game, no wait is generated. At that time, the rotation of the reel for the game in the game is started. On the other hand, after the end of one game, when a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting medals or the like and the game start operation is performed in a state where the game start operation is enabled, the reel rotation of the previous game is started. If the game time that started counting from the point in time is less than the specified time, that is, if the specified time has not elapsed since the start of reel rotation in the previous game, a wait is generated and the reel rotation is started at that point. Instead, the game waits until the game time that has started timing from the start of reel rotation of the previous game reaches a specified time, and starts reel rotation when the specified time is reached.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs control to output an external output signal indicating a game state, an error occurrence state, and the like. These external output signals are output to a hall device such as a hall computer through an external output board 1000 and an information providing terminal board of a game shop (hall) in which the slot machine 1 is installed.

  The main control unit 41 includes a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a prize, and a gaming state during RB (regular bonus). RB signal indicating that the gaming state is BB (Big Bonus), an BB signal indicating that the gaming state is being started, an ART signal indicating that an ART to be described later is started, a door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is being opened, and a later described A setting change signal indicating that the mode has shifted to the setting change mode, a throw-in error signal indicating an abnormality of the medal selector, and a pay-out error signal indicating an abnormality of the hopper unit 34 are output.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit, a parallel-serial conversion circuit, and a terminal for each output signal, and is provided with a connector to be electrically connected to a circuit of the information providing terminal board. Among the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, the RB signal, the BB signal, and the ART signal are directly output as pulse signals to the information providing terminal board via the relay circuit. . On the other hand, the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal are converted by a parallel-serial conversion circuit into security signals, which are serial signals that can be individually identified, and information is provided. Output to terminal board.

  Next, a command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the sub control unit 91 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 instructs the sub-control unit 91 to input a number-of-inserted command, a credit command, a game status command, an ART status command, an internal winning command, a second lottery-related command, a pressing order command, a freeze command. , ART lottery result command, reel acceleration information command, acceleration completion command, stop operation command, sliding frame number command, stop command, game end command, winning determination command, payout start command, payout end command, standby command, stop command , A plurality of types of commands including an error command, a return command, a setting command, a setting confirmation command, a door command, and an operation detection command. These commands are composed of 1-byte type data indicating the type of the command and 1-byte extended data indicating the content of the command. The sub-control unit 91 can determine the type of the command from the type data.

  The inserted number command is a command capable of specifying the inserted number of medals, that is, the number of medals used for setting the bet amount, and is a state from the end of the game (after changing the setting) to the start of the game. Or, when a medal is inserted in a state where the specified number of bets is not set, or when the MAXBET switch 6 is operated to set the number of bets, this is transmitted. Further, since the inserted number command is transmitted when the operation of setting the bet amount is performed, it is possible to specify that the operation of setting the bet amount has been performed by receiving the inserted number command.

  The credit command is a command capable of specifying the number of medals stored as credit, and is a state from the end of the game (after changing the setting) to the start of the game. In a state in which a specified number of bets is set, Sent when medals are inserted and credits are added.

  The game state command is a command capable of specifying the game state (RT0 to 4, RB) of the game, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The ART state command indicates whether or not the game is in the AT, whether or not the game is in the ART, whether or not the game is in the added state, the number of remaining games until reaching a prescribed number of games described later, the number of remaining games in the precursor period, the number of remaining games in the ART. Is transmitted when the game starts and after the game state command.

  The internal winning command is a command capable of specifying an internal lottery result, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game and after the ART state command. The internal winning command includes a first internal winning command that can specify whether or not the special role has been won, and a second internal winning command that can specify whether or not the general role has been won, After transmitting the first internal winning command, a second internal winning command is transmitted.

  The second lottery-related command is a command capable of specifying the second lottery information, which is information related to the second lottery, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game and after the internal winning command. Is done. The second lottery information includes, for example, information indicating whether the second lottery has been performed and, when the second lottery has been performed, whether a predetermined combination has been won in the second lottery. included.

  The pressing order command is a command capable of specifying the stop order, which is when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game, after the internal winning command is transmitted, and when the reels are stopped. Each time the control is performed, it is transmitted after the stop command is transmitted. Note that in a game in which navigation notification described later is executed, a pressing order command that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted from the start of the game, and in a game in which navigation notification described later is not executed, an advantageous stop is performed. Until the order is determined, a push order command that cannot specify a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted, and from the time the advantageous stop order is determined, a push order command that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted. You.

  Since the game state command, the ART state command, and the internal winning command are transmitted when the game is started by operating the start switch 7, by receiving these commands, the start switch 7 is operated to start the game. It can be specified.

  The freeze command is a command that can specify whether or not the game is controlled to be in a freeze state that delays the progress of the game for a predetermined period of time in the game, and when the game is controlled to be in the freeze state, the type thereof can be specified. And transmitted after transmitting the internal winning command.

  The ART lottery result command is a command capable of specifying whether or not an ART lottery or an additional lottery, which will be described later, has been won, the number of the selected ART games or the number of additional games, and is used when the game is started. Sent after transmission of an internal winning command in a game in which a lottery or an additional lottery is performed.

  The reel acceleration information command is a command that can specify that the rotation of the reel starts with the progress of the game, and is transmitted when the rotation of the reel starts with the progress of the game. It is also transmitted when the rotation of the reel is started along with the end of the freeze state. Therefore, after the start of the freeze state is specified by the freeze command, the reel acceleration information command is received, so that the game progresses according to the progress of the game. It is possible to specify not only the start of the rotation of the reel but also the end of the freeze state.

  The acceleration completion command is a command that can specify that the acceleration of the reel accompanying the start of the game has been completed. When the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started when the game is started, all the Sent when the reels 2L, 2C, 2R rotate at a constant speed.

  The stop operation command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and the area number of the stop operation position of the corresponding reel. It is transmitted each time the accompanying stop control is performed.

  The number of sliding frames command is a command capable of specifying whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, or the number of sliding frames to be moved from when the corresponding reel is stopped to when it is stopped. Each time the stop control associated with the stop operation of each reel is performed, it is transmitted after the corresponding stop operation command is transmitted.

  The stop command is a command capable of specifying whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, and the area number of the stop position of the corresponding reel, and the stop control accompanying the stop operation of each reel. Is transmitted after the corresponding slide frame number command is transmitted.

  The stop operation command, the number of sliding frames command, and the stop command can specify whether the reel to be stopped is a left reel, a middle reel, or a right reel, and is associated with the stop operation of each reel. Since the command is transmitted every time the stop control is performed, by receiving these commands, it is possible to specify that any one of the reels has been stopped and the reel to be stopped.

  The game end command is a command that can specify that the game has ended, and is transmitted when the player presses a stop switch to stop the third stop reel and releases the stop switch.

  The prize determination command is a command capable of specifying the presence or absence of a prize, a combination of symbols aligned on a prize line LN, a type of a prize, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of a prize, so that the player stops the third stop reel. This is when the stop switch is pressed down and the stop switch is released, and is transmitted after the transmission of the game end command.

  Since both the game end command and the winning determination command are transmitted when the player presses the stop switch to stop the third stop reel and releases the stop switch, by receiving these commands, It is possible to specify that all the operations necessary to advance one game are completed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals due to winning or the settlement of credits (including medals used for setting the number of bets) is started. The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when payout of medals due to winning and credit settlement is completed.

  The standby command is a command indicating that a transition to a standby state is performed. After the end of one game, when the estimated end time (60 seconds in this embodiment) elapses without a bet amount being set and a transition is made to the standby state, a credit is issued. The payout of the medals due to the settlement of the medals (including the medals used for setting the number of bets) is completed, and is transmitted after the payout end command is transmitted.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state. After the BB ends, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. At the time when the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  The error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state and the type of the error state.When an error is determined, and when the state is controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence and the type of the error state is transmitted and reset. When the operation is performed and the error state is released, an error command indicating the release of the error state is transmitted.

  The return command is a command indicating that the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power failure, and is transmitted when the main control unit 41 has returned to the control state before the power failure at the time of activation.

  The setting command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting change state, the setting value after the setting change, a setting command indicating the start of the setting change state is transmitted at the time of transition to the setting change state, and when the setting change state ends, A setting command indicating the end of the setting change state and the setting value after the setting change is transmitted. In addition, since the control state of the main control unit 41 is initialized along with the transition to the setting change state, it is possible to specify that the control state of the main control unit 41 has been initialized by the setting command indicating the start of setting. .

  The setting confirmation command is a command that indicates the start or end of the setting confirmation state. A setting confirmation command that indicates the start of the setting confirmation is sent when moving to the setting confirmation state, and a setting that indicates the end of the setting confirmation when the setting confirmation state ends. A confirmation command is sent.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door open detection switch 25, that is, on (open state) / off (closed state), at power-on, at the end of one game (after the end of the game, the bet amount of the next game). Are transmitted before the setting can be started) and when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 changes (from on to off, from off to on).

  The operation detection command is a command indicating a detection state (on / off) of operation switches (MAX BET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R), and is transmitted at regular intervals.

  Of these commands, commands other than the operation detection command are generated in the main processing, temporarily stored in a command queue provided in the RAM 41c, and transmitted in the subsequent command transmission processing of the timer interrupt processing (main).

  On the other hand, the operation detection command is generated based on the detection state of the switch every time the command transmission processing of the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed ten times, and is temporarily stored in a command queue provided in the RAM 41c. Is transmitted in the command transmission processing of the subsequent timer interruption processing (main).

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 based on the command transmitted from the main control unit 41 to the effect control board 90 will be described. When receiving a command from the main control unit 41, the sub control unit 91 executes a command reception interrupt process. In the command reception interrupt processing, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in a reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  In the timer interrupt processing (sub), the sub control unit 91 determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. The control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to based on the command received in the step, and the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, and the like are controlled based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table. Controls the output of various effect devices. In the control pattern table, for each of a plurality of types of effect patterns, a display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, a lighting mode of the effect LED 52, an output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, a lighting mode of the reel LED 55, and the like. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and upon receiving the command, the sub-control unit 91 sets the control pattern of the control pattern registered in the control pattern table corresponding to the effect pattern set in the RAM 91c in the game. The control device refers to the control pattern corresponding to the type of the received command, and controls the output of the effect device based on the control pattern. As a result, an effect according to the effect pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  When a new command is received during the execution of the effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub-control unit 91 stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and returns to the newly received command. An effect based on the corresponding control pattern is executed. In other words, when a new command is received even in a state where the production has not been completed to the end, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new production is performed unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command will be executed.

  The effect pattern is selected at the selection rate according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command when the internal winning command is received, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the internal control command is received, the sub-control unit 91 sets the effect in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal win command. With reference to the registered selection rate, one of a plurality of effect patterns is selected from the plurality of effect patterns in accordance with the selected rate, and the selected effect pattern is set as the effect pattern of the game in the RAM 91c. Also, even if the same command is received, different control patterns are selected depending on the effect pattern selected at the time of receiving the internal winning command, and as a result, different effects may be performed depending on the effect pattern.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 executes a navigation period for notifying the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result by the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12 and a navigation period. It can be controlled at a certain assist time (hereinafter, referred to as AT).

  When controlled by the AT, the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification by winning the navigation target combination corresponding to the game state, and executes the navigation notification based on the winning number of the selected navigation notification combination. By notifying the stop order that is advantageous to the player and transmitting a push order command capable of specifying the stop order that is advantageous to the player based on the winning number to the sub-control unit 91, the liquid crystal display 51 and the like are displayed. To perform a navigation effect using. Further, in the present embodiment, even in a normal state where the AT is not controlled, the main control unit 41 can execute the navigation notification and the navigation effect by satisfying a certain condition.

  FIG. 6 is an address map of a memory area used by the main control unit 41. As shown in FIG. 6, the memory area used by the main control unit 41 includes a memory area (0000H to 7FFFH) allocated to the ROM 41b and a memory area (F000H to FFFFH) allocated to the RAM 41c.

  The memory area of the ROM 41b includes a program / data area (0000H to 26FFH) in which programs and fixed data are stored, a ROM comment area (2700H to 277FH) in which arbitrary data such as a program title and version can be set, A vector table area (2780H to 27A7H) in which an upper address of a subroutine of a CALLV instruction to be executed and a start address of a timer interrupt process (main) are set, and parameters for setting internal functions of the main control unit 41 by hardware. Are set, and an unused area (2800H to 7FFFH) where access is prohibited is included.

  The parameters set in the HW parameter area in the ROM 41b include the last address (HPREND) of the ROM area used in the program / data area, the start address (HRAMSTAT) and the last address (HRAMEND) of the RAM area whose access is prohibited.

  The memory area of the RAM 41c includes an available area (F000H to F400H) that can be used as a work, and an internal function register area (F4B0H to F4B0H) in which a register group for controlling each function mounted on the main control unit 41 is stored. F6FFH) and unused areas where access is prohibited (F401H to F4AFH, F700H to FFFFH).

  FIG. 7 is an address map of the program / data area in the ROM 41b and the usable area in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the program / data area in the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which a game program related to the progress of the game is stored, a game data area in which game data used by the game program is stored, It includes a use area 1, a non-game program area in which a non-game program not related to the progress of the game is stored, a non-game data area in which non-game data used by the non-game program is stored, and an unused area 2. .

  The progress of the game is to advance a series of processes constituting the game. In the case of a slot machine, the number of bets is set and the game can be started. Advancing a step of causing the reel to stop, deriving a display result, and giving a value such as a medal according to the display result.

  A game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game are separately allocated, and are allocated rearward in the storage area of the ROM 41b among the game program area and the non-program area. Since the unused area 1 having at least 16 bytes or more is allocated to the area before the non-program area, the storage area includes a game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game. Can be easily specified according to the difference between

  Further, the game program area and the game data area, and the non-game program area and the non-game data area are respectively allocated to continuous areas, while the game program area and the game data area related to the progress of the game and the non-game data area related to the progress of the game. Since the game program and the non-game data area are allocated to areas that are not continuous across the unused area 1 of at least 16 bytes or more, the game program area and the game data area related to the progress of the game and the A non-game program and a non-game data area that are not related can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

  In the above description, “before and after the storage area” means the magnitude relationship of the address values assigned to the storage area, with the smaller address being the front and the larger address being the rear. For this reason, a storage area allocated behind one storage area corresponds to a storage area having an address value larger than that of one storage area, and a storage area allocated ahead of one storage area. , A storage area having an address value smaller than that of one storage area.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a game program is allocated behind the non-game program area, and an unused area is allocated in front of the game program allocated behind the non-game program area. A game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

  Further, the game program area and the non-game program area may be assigned to areas adjacent to each other with the unused area 1 interposed therebetween. A non-game program irrespective of the progress of the game can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

  Further, in the unused areas 1 and 2 of the program / data area of the ROM 41b, since 0 values are stored in all areas, a game program area and a game data area, a non-game program area and a non-game data, The unused areas 1 and 2 can be easily distinguished from each other, and even when illegal data is stored in the unused areas 1 and 2, it can be easily found.

  It should be noted that the configuration may be such that 1 is stored in all the unused areas 1 and 2 of the program / data area of the ROM 41b. Even in such a configuration, the game program area and the game data area and the non-game The program area and the non-game data can be easily distinguished from the unused areas 1 and 2, and even if invalid data is stored in the unused areas 1 and 2, it can be easily found. .

  Further, if the configuration is such that the game program area and the non-game program area are assigned to separate areas, the game program area and the non-game program area may be configured to be applied to adjacent areas. Even with such a configuration, a game program area related to the progress of the game and a non-game program not related to the progress of the game can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

  In addition, both the game program area and the non-game program area start from the address (0H) of the same lower 4 digits when the address is expressed in binary notation, and the program / data area of the ROM 41b. Among them, the game program area related to the progress of the game and the non-game program area not related to the progress of the game can be easily distinguished from other areas.

  In addition, both the game program area and the non-game program area not only start from the address of the same lower 4 digits when the address is expressed in binary but also the lower 1 digit when the address is expressed in hexadecimal. Starts from the same address (0H) of 0, so that the game program area and the non-game program area can be easily distinguished from other areas not only in the case where the address is expressed in binary but also in the case where the address is expressed in hexadecimal. can do.

  In both the game program area and the non-game program area, regardless of whether the address is expressed in binary or hexadecimal, the lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) digits starts from the address having the same value. With such a configuration, the game program area and the non-game program area can be easily distinguished from other areas. For example, the lower N (N is a natural number of 1 or more) digit 1 is the same. The same effect can be obtained by a configuration starting from the address of (1).

  As shown in FIG. 7B, the usable area of the RAM 41c includes a game RAM area used as a work by the game program, a non-game RAM area used as a work by the non-game program, and an unused area 4. The game RAM area includes a special work, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack area in which a game program saves data. The non-game RAM area includes a game stack area. It includes an area that can be referenced by a program, an area that cannot be referenced by a game program, and a non-game stack area in which a non-game program saves data. In the present embodiment, the game stack area and the non-game stack area are individually provided in different areas. However, a configuration in which one stack area shared by the game program and the non-game program may be provided.

  The unused area 3 is an area in which neither the game program nor the non-game program is used, and is a surplus area with respect to the game RAM area having a predetermined capacity.

  The unused area 4 is an area of 16 bytes or more in which neither the game program nor the non-game program is used. Since the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are allocated to areas that are not continuous across the unused area 4, the game RAM area used by the game program related to the progress of the game and the non-game RAM area The non-game RAM area used by the game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

  Hereinafter, the game program area, the game data area, and the game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a game area, and the non-game program area, the non-game data area, and the non-game RAM area may be collectively referred to as a non-game area. . The unused area 1 and the unused area 2, the unused area 3 and the unused area 4 may be collectively referred to as an unused area.

  The main control unit 41, based on a parameter set in the HW parameter area, permits access to an available area of the RAM 41c when access to an area of the program / data area of the ROM 41b is prohibited. When an area other than the set area is accessed, when an area other than the program / data area in the ROM 41b is accessed, and when an area other than the usable area in the RAM 41c is accessed, That is, when an illegal access is reset when an access is made to a memory area that cannot be accessed in a normal operation, the progress of the game is disabled. Therefore, an unused area of the ROM 41b or an area unrelated to the operation is used. If an unauthorized program is stored in an unused area or the like of the RAM 41c, Even, it is possible to prevent illegal program from being executed.

  Particularly, in the present embodiment, a game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to a program / data area of the ROM 41b to which access is permitted by the program, and the program / data area is located before the non-game program area behind the game program area. An unused area 1 is allocated to the area, and a lump of the program / data area including the area from the start address of the game program area to the end address of the non-game program is set based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. The access to the area (the area from the game program area to the non-game data area) is set to be permitted all at once, while the other areas, that is, the game programs, game data, non-game programs, Non-game data is not stored Because it is forbidden access to the area later than trick data, it is possible to prevent conducted unintended control by malware or illegal data.

  Further, in the program / data area of the ROM 41b to which access is permitted by the program, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area, and an unused area is provided in an area before the game program area behind the non-game program area. Is assigned and, based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, access to a group of areas including the area from the start address of the non-game program area to the end address of the game program in the program / data area is collectively performed. Even if the access is set to permission while access to other areas is prohibited, unintended control by an unauthorized program or unauthorized data can be prevented.

  A game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area, and an unused area 1 is allocated to an area in front of the non-game program area behind the game program area. Of the areas, one area including the game program area (the area from the game program area to the game data area) and one area including the non-game program (the area from the non-game program area to the non-game data area) A configuration may be adopted in which access is set to allow access and access to other areas is prohibited. Even in such a configuration, access is made to an area of the program / data area where no game program or non-game program is stored. Access is prohibited, the intention of malicious programs and data Can be prevented without control will take place. Further, in the program / data area of the ROM 41b to which access is permitted by the program, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area, and an unused area is provided in an area before the game program area behind the non-game program area. Are allocated, and among the program / data areas, a group including the game program area (area from the game program area to the game data area) and a group including the non-game program (from the non-game program area to the non-game Access to the data area) and access to other areas may be prohibited. Even in such a configuration, a game program or a non-game Access to an area where no program is stored Because There is inhibited, it is possible to prevent conducted unintended control by malware or illegal data.

  Further, in the above description, the area to which access is permitted in the program / data area itself is set. However, by setting the area to which access is prohibited in the program / data area, the area to which access is indirectly set is set. It is good also as a structure performed.

  The main control unit 41 determines, based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, that the user program is executed in an area other than the designated area where the program traveling is permitted, that is, that the user program is executed in a normal operation. When the user program is executed in the non-existing area, the IAT circuit 506a outputs the IAT generation signal, thereby disabling the progress of the game. Therefore, the unused area of the ROM 41b, the area unrelated to the operation, and the unoccupied area of the RAM 41c. Even if an unauthorized program is stored in the use area or the like, the execution of the unauthorized program can be prevented.

  Particularly, in the present embodiment, a game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to a program / data area of the ROM 41b to which access is permitted by the program, and the program / data area is located before the non-game program area behind the game program area. The unused area 1 is allocated to the area, and the IAT circuit 506a permits the program run for each of the game program area and the non-game program area in the program / data area based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area. While the area is set as the designated area, the program running in the other area, that is, the area where the game program and the non-game program are not stored in the program / data area is prohibited. Control line It can be prevented been.

  Further, in the program / data area of the ROM 41b to which access is permitted by the program, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area, and an unused area is provided in an area before the game program area behind the non-game program area. Is assigned, and based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, the IAT circuit 506a sets each of the game program area and the non-game program area in the program / data area as a designated area in which the program running is permitted. Thus, even if the program running in other areas is prohibited, it is possible to prevent unintended control by an unauthorized program or unauthorized data from being performed.

  Note that a game program area and a non-game program area are allocated to the program / data area, an unused area 1 is allocated to an area in front of the non-game program area behind the game program area, and an HW parameter area is allocated. Based on the parameters set in (1), a group of areas (areas from the game program area to the non-game data area) including the area from the start address of the game program area to the last address of the non-game program in the program / data area , The IAT circuit 506a may collectively set the designated area for permitting the program running and prohibit the program running in other areas. Even in such a configuration, the program / data area Of which game programs and non-game programs are stored Since the program running in the absence area is prohibited, it is possible to prevent conducted unintended control by malware or illegal data. Further, in the program / data area of the ROM 41b to which access is permitted by the program, a game area is allocated behind the non-game program area, and an unused area is provided in an area before the game program area behind the non-game program area. Are assigned, and based on the parameters set in the HW parameter area, a group of areas (from the game program area to the end address of the game program) including the area from the start address of the non-game program area to the end address of the game program in the program / data area The area up to the non-game data area) is collectively set by the IAT circuit 506a as a designated area where program running is permitted, and program running in other areas is prohibited. Unintended control It can be prevented been.

  Further, in the above description, the area for permitting the program running is set in the program / data area. However, the area for prohibiting the program running is set in the program / data area, so that the program running is indirectly permitted. A configuration in which an area is set may be adopted.

  The program executed by the main control unit 41 includes a main routine for managing the progress of the entire program, and a subroutine called during execution of another program.

  Also, a CALL instruction is included as an instruction for causing the main control unit 41 to execute a program stored in the program / data area.

  The CALL instruction is an instruction to call and execute a subroutine stored at an address designated in a main routine or a subroutine. When calling the subroutine by the CALL instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the address of the caller in the stack area, calls and executes the subroutine stored at the specified address. Then, after the subroutine ends, the process returns to the address of the caller stored in the stack area, that is, the main routine or the subroutine program of the caller who has executed the CALL instruction.

  The CALL instruction includes a normal CALL instruction and a CALLV instruction which is a special CALL instruction. A normal CALL instruction is an instruction that specifies an upper address and a lower address to specify both an upper address and a lower address and specifies an address and calls a subroutine, whereas a CALLV instruction specifies only a lower address. By doing so, the subroutine is called by specifying an address based on an upper address preset in the vector table area of the ROM 41b and a specified lower address, and calls the subroutine with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal CALL instruction. It becomes possible.

  The RST instruction is an instruction for calling a subroutine stored at a specific address corresponding to a specified value to execute by designating a value corresponding to a plurality of predetermined specific addresses. A subroutine can be called with a smaller amount of data than an instruction or a CALLV instruction. When calling the subroutine by the RST instruction, the main control unit 41 stores the caller address in the stack area, calls and executes the subroutine stored at the specific address corresponding to the designated value. Then, after the subroutine ends, the process returns to the address of the caller stored in the stack area, that is, the main routine or subroutine of the caller who has executed the RST instruction.

  The jump instruction is an instruction for moving to a program stored at an address specified in a main routine or a subroutine. The main control unit 41 moves to the program stored at the address specified by the jump command, and executes the destination program. In this case, unlike the CALL instruction or the RST instruction, even if the program after the movement ends, the program does not return to the source program.

  The main control unit 41 includes an LD instruction as an instruction to read data stored in the program / data area. The LD instruction is an instruction for reading data stored at an address specified in a main routine or a subroutine into a specified register. The main control unit 41 reads the data stored at the address specified by the LD instruction, and stores the read data in the register specified by the LD instruction.

  A subroutine frequently used among the game programs stored in the ROM 41b is stored in a region of the game program region of the ROM 41b where the start address is a specific value (for example, 00H). On the other hand, in the vector table area of the ROM 41b, a specific value is set as an upper address of a subroutine called by the CALLV instruction. Then, when calling the subroutine in which the upper address of the top address becomes a specific value, the main control unit 41 specifies only the lower address using the CALLV instruction, thereby changing the specific value set in the vector table area as the upper address. Then, the lower address specified as the lower address is specified, and the subroutine stored at the combined upper and lower addresses is called and executed. For this reason, an upper address constituting a part of an address used when calling a particularly frequently used subroutine in the game program is set in the vector table in advance as a specific value, and based on the specific value set in the vector table. Address, the subroutine can be called with a smaller amount of data as compared with a normal CALL instruction for calling a program by designating both the upper address and the lower address. It is possible to reduce waste of a program for specifying an address.

  A particularly frequently used subroutine among the non-game programs stored in the ROM 41b is stored in an area of the non-game program area of the ROM 41b where the start address is a specific value, and a CALLV instruction is stored in a vector table area of the ROM 41b. By setting a specific value as an upper address of a subroutine to be called in the subroutine, and when the main control unit 41 calls a subroutine in which the upper address of the head address becomes a specific value, only the lower address is specified using the CALLV instruction, whereby these subroutines are designated. , The subroutine can be called with a smaller amount of data compared to a normal CALL instruction that calls a program by specifying both the upper address and the lower address. When calling It is possible to reduce the waste of program for specifying the address.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the upper address used when calling by the CALLV instruction is set in a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of the vector table area.

  In addition to the CALLV instruction, a part of the address is specified by using a value stored in a vector table area, a value set in a specific register, and the like, and by specifying the remaining part of the address, With a configuration using a special CALL instruction capable of specifying the storage address of the subroutine, it is possible to reduce waste of a program for specifying an address when calling a subroutine. Also, an identification value having a smaller data amount than an address is assigned to each of a plurality of areas constituting the vector table area, and a storage address of a subroutine is set to each of the plurality of areas, and the identification value is specified to specify the identification value. Even with a configuration using a special CALL instruction capable of specifying a storage address of a subroutine stored in an area corresponding to a value, it is possible to reduce waste of a program for specifying an address when calling a subroutine. .

  Further, game data that is particularly frequently used among the game data stored in the ROM 41b is stored in a region of the game data region of the ROM 41b where the start address is a specific value, and a special LD is stored in the vector table region of the ROM 41b. By setting a specific value as the upper address of the data to be read by the instruction, and when the main control unit 41 calls game data in which the upper address of the top address becomes the specific value, the lower address is specified using a special LD instruction. Even in the case where the game data is read out, it is possible to call out the game data with a smaller amount of data as compared with a normal LD instruction for reading out the data by specifying both the upper address and the lower address. Of the program for specifying the address when reading the game data of It can be reduced.

  In addition, the non-game data that is particularly frequently used among the non-game data stored in the ROM 41b is stored in the non-game data area of the ROM 41b where the head address is a specific value, and the non-game data is stored in the vector table area of the ROM 41b. When a specific value is set as an upper address of data to be read by a special LD instruction, and when the main control unit 41 calls non-game data in which the upper address of the head address is a specific value, only the lower address is used by using the special LD instruction. By designating, even if the configuration is such that the non-game data is read, the non-game data is called with a smaller amount of data as compared with a normal LD instruction for reading data by specifying both the upper address and the lower address. And a process for specifying an address when reading these non-game data. It is possible to reduce the waste of lamb.

  Also in these cases, a configuration may be adopted in which the upper address used when calling with a special LD instruction is set in a specific register of the main control unit 41 instead of the vector table area.

  Part of the address is specified using the value stored in the vector table area, the value set in a specific register, etc., and the data storage address can be specified by specifying the remaining part of the address. With a configuration using a special LD instruction, it is possible to reduce waste of a program for specifying an address when reading data. In addition, an identification value having a smaller data amount than an address is assigned to each of a plurality of areas constituting the vector table area, and a data storage address is set for each of the plurality of areas, and the identification value is specified to specify the identification value. Even with a configuration using a special LD instruction that can specify a storage address of data stored in an area corresponding to a value, it is possible to reduce waste of a program for specifying an address when reading data. .

  The main control unit 41 is activated when a system reset by input of a system reset signal, a WDT reset by the WDT 506b, and the above-mentioned illegal access reset occur. At this time, the value set in the vector table area, that is, The upper address of the subroutine of the CALLV instruction and the start address of the timer interrupt processing (main) are values indicating the area where the program or the like is actually stored in the program area, or FFFFH (in the unused vector table area). Is determined, and if the value set in the vector table area is neither a value indicating outside the area where the program is set nor FFFFH, the program is not started. , Processing that is not originally intended is executed due to the occurrence of an interrupt, etc. In advance it can be prevented.

  The game program is a program related to the progress of the game, and is a program for executing a process that hinders the progress of the game unless a process based on the program is executed. On the other hand, the non-game program is a program that is not related to the progress of the game, and even if it is called from the game program and returns to the game program without executing the processing based on the program, the game can be advanced. This is a program for executing processing.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the game program includes a game dedicated program included only in the game program, and a common determination program and a common general-purpose program included in both the game program and the non-game program.

  The game-specific program includes, for example, a game start waiting process, a main lottery-related process, an internal lottery process, a reel control process, a game end setting process, an external output 1 process, an initial setting process, a power interruption process, an abnormal winning determination process, and an error. Including processing. The game start waiting process is for setting the bet amount by inserting medals or the like after the control of one game is completed, and starting the game by operating the start switch 7 after the specified number of bets is set. The main lottery-related process is a process for performing an internal lottery process, an additional lottery in an additional state described later, and setting of an AT state. The internal lottery process is called in the main lottery-related process to execute the internal lottery. The reel control process is a process for starting the rotation of the reels and stopping the reels by operating the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. The time setting process is a process for determining whether or not a prize has occurred according to the stop position of the stopped reel, and for performing payout of medals, setting of re-games, transition of a game state, and the like. The external output 1 process is a process for controlling the output of the medal IN signal, the medal OUT signal, the RB signal, the BB signal, and the RT signal among the external output signals. This is a process for making the game possible at the time of insertion (confirmation of backup abnormality, initialization of registers, etc.). The power interruption process is for returning to the state before the power interruption when the power interruption occurs. The abnormal winning determination process is a process of determining whether or not an abnormal winning has occurred in which an unaccepted winning combination is performed. The error process includes various types of abnormalities (medal insertion abnormalities, medal selector 29, etc.). Foreign matter detection, reel rotation abnormality, medal payout abnormality, foreign matter detection near the payout exit, RAM abnormality, set value abnormality, hopper tank 34a empty, overflow tank 35 full tank detection Abnormal prize, etc.) is a process for disabling the game when is detected. Although not specifically shown, the game program also includes processing related to the above-described AT (such as lottery related to the AT and control related to navigation notification).

  The common determination program in the game program includes, for example, an insertion determination process and a payout determination process. The insertion determination process is a process of determining whether or not a medal is normally passed by the inserted medal sensor 31, and is a process executed in a state where medals can be inserted for setting a bet amount or the like. The payout determination process is a process of determining whether or not the medal is normally passed by the payout sensor 34c, and is a process executed in a state in which the payout of the medal is permitted at the time of winning a small combination or at the time of credit settlement. It is.

  The common general-purpose program in the game program is a process called and executed from a plurality of types of processes constituting the game program. For example, a counter update process, a port input process, a data conversion process, an LED display process, a data setting process, Including command setting processing. The counter update process is a process for updating a designated counter value, the port input process is a process for acquiring an input state of a designated port, and the data conversion process is a process for inputting game data. The LED display process is a process of setting the designated value to be displayed on the LED, and the data setting process is a process of setting the designated data. The command setting process is a process of setting a specified command in a command queue.

  In particular, when an abnormality is detected as described above, the game program executes a reset condition (such as a random number abnormality, a RAM abnormality, a backup abnormality, or a setting value abnormality in the case of a setting value abnormality, Error processing to disable the progress of the game until a reset operation is established in the case of an abnormality other than the above.

  As shown in FIG. 8, the non-game program includes a non-game dedicated program included only in the non-game program, and a common determination program and a common general-purpose program that are the same as the game program.

  Non-gaming dedicated programs include, for example, test signal output processing, foreign object detection processing, door monitoring processing, external output 2 processing, inserted medal error determination processing, payout medal error determination processing, power failure determination processing, normal command transmission processing, power interruption Time command transmission processing. The test signal output process is a process for outputting a test signal generated in association with the result of the game, and the foreign object detection process is a process for detecting a foreign object in the medal passage by the slot sensor 26, The door monitoring process is a process for detecting the opening of the front door 1b, and the external output 2 process is a process of detecting a security signal (a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a dispensing error signal) among the external output signals. This is a process for performing output control. In the inserted medal error determination process, based on the detection status of the inserted medal sensor 31, detection of a backflow of the inserted medal, detection of a clogged medal in the medal selector 29, and detection of a foreign object in the medal selector 29 are performed. The payout medal error determination processing is performed based on the detection state of the payout sensor 34c. The power failure determination process is a process for determining whether or not a voltage drop signal from the power interruption detection circuit 48 has been detected. The transmission process is a process for transmitting, to the sub-control unit 91, one command set first among the commands set in the command queue by the command setting process of the game dedicated program and the non-game dedicated program. The power-off command transmission process is a process for transmitting all commands set in the command queue to the sub-control unit 91.

  The common general-purpose program in the non-game program is a process called and executed from a plurality of types of processes constituting the non-game program, and like the common general-purpose program in the game program, for example, a counter update process, a port input process, It includes data conversion processing, LED display processing, data setting processing, and command setting processing.

  The non-game program includes a process of determining whether or not a predetermined detection state is based on the detection state of the detection means (the insertion port sensor 26, the full tank sensor 35a, and the door open detection switch 25) which are not related to the progress of the game.

  Further, the non-game program functions as a detection means relating to the progress of the game in a specific control state among a plurality of control states (game start waiting processing, internal lottery processing, reel control processing, game end setting processing). In other control states, the detecting means (for example, the inserted medal sensor 31 and the payout sensor 34c) functioning as detecting means not related to the progress of the game is based on the detection state in the control state not related to the progress of the game. A process of determining whether or not a predetermined detection situation is present (for example, a process of detecting inserted medals and a process of detecting paid-out medals for detecting an abnormality due to detection of insertion of medals during spinning of the reels and payout of medals). Including. In addition, since such a determination process is the same process as determining whether or not a predetermined detection status is based on a detection status in a control state related to the progress of a game in a game program, it corresponds to a common determination program. .

  In the processing included in the game program, the external output 1 processing, the processing of counting the number of inserted medals in the game start waiting processing, the processing of switching the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the number of medals paid out in the game end setting processing are performed. Processing that is not directly related to the progress of the game, such as counting, processing for detecting that the hopper tank 34a has been emptied, processing for updating software random numbers, processing related to AT, transmission of internal winning commands, etc. If so, all or a part of these processes may be included in the non-game program. On the other hand, all or some of the processes included in the non-game program may be included in the game program as long as they are indirectly related to the progress of the game.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 41a of the main control unit 41 calls the non-game program in the process based on the game program, executes the process based on the non-game program, and executes the process based on the non-game program. Then, the process returns to the process based on the game program.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 41a executes the processing based on the game program with reference to the game data in the game data area, and uses the game RAM area as a work when executing the processing based on the game program in principle. It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the game RAM area. In addition, when executing the processing based on the non-gaming program in principle, the CPU 41a executes the processing based on the non-gaming program with reference to the game data in the non-gaming data area, and uses the non-gaming RAM area as a work, It is possible to refer to and update the contents of the non-game RAM area.

  Further, in executing the processing based on the game program, the CPU 41a does not refer to the non-game data area and does not update the non-game RAM area, but can refer to the non-game RAM area. In executing the processing based on the non-game program, the game RAM area is not updated and the game RAM area is not updated, but the game RAM area can be referred to.

  In addition, the processing based on the game program can refer only to a specific area (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection) of the non-game RAM area necessary for the game program. In the processing based on the game RAM area, only a specific area required for the non-game program (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a game state setting area, an RT setting area, and the like) can be referred to. In addition, a specific area in the non-game RAM area where processing based on the game program can be referred to, and a specific area in the game RAM area where processing based on the non-game program can be referred to may be assigned to consecutive address areas. Although preferred, a configuration in which a part or the whole is allocated to a discontinuous address area may be used.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, a game program area in which a game program relating to the progress of a game is stored, a game data area in which game data referred to by the game program is readablely stored, and work data referred to by the game program. Are stored in a readable and writable manner, a non-game program area which is a program called by the game program, and stores a non-game program irrespective of the progress of the game, and a non-game which is referred to by the non-game program. Since a non-game data area in which data is stored in a readable manner and a non-game RAM area in which work data referenced by the non-game program is stored in a readable and writable manner are separately allocated, a game program, Game data and game program work data, Game program, the workpiece data of the non game data and non-game program, can be easily identified according to a difference in the storage area.

  Also, by dividing the game program area and the game data area from the non-game program area and the non-game data area, the area occupied in the ROM 41b can be compactly managed according to each function. It becomes even easier to identify the relevant data.

  Further, in this embodiment, it is possible to refer to the non-game RAM area when executing the game program, and to refer to the game RAM area when executing the non-game program. In executing the game program, the data used by the non-game program can be easily used, and in executing the non-game program, the data used by the game program can be easily used. On the other hand, when the game program is executed, it is impossible to update the non-game RAM area, and when the non-game program is executed, it is impossible to update the game RAM area. Does not affect the processing of the non-game program, and the non-game program does not affect the processing of the game program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the processing based on the game program can refer only to a specific area required for the game program (for example, an error flag setting area indicating abnormality detection) in the non-game RAM area. In the processing based on the non-game program, only a specific area (for example, an internal winning flag setting area, a game state setting area, an RT setting area, etc.) necessary for the non-game program in the game RAM area can be referred to. Since the data which can be referred to by the game program in the non-game RAM area and the data which can be referred to by the non-game program are limited to a specific area, the reference destination of the game program or the non-game program can be easily specified. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can call a non-game program from a process based on the game program during execution of the main process. As shown, it is possible to call a non-game program from a process based on the game program during execution of the timer interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 10A, when a non-game program is called from the main process based on the game program, the start address of the non-game program to be called is set in a specific area in the game program, and the common call process is performed. Execute 1. The common call process 1 is a process included in the game program. In the common call process 1, the register of the game program is saved in the game stack area, and the stack pointer (SP, an address indicating the current position of the game stack area) Is saved to the SP save area of the game RAM area, the timer interrupt is set to be prohibited by setting the value of the interrupt master permission flag to a value indicating that the interrupt is prohibited, and then set to a specific area. Call the non-gaming program at the address you are at.

  On the other hand, based on the called non-game program, the stack pointer (non-SP, address indicating the current position of the non-game stack area) of the non-game program is set, and the processing of the non-game program is executed. Thereafter, the process returns to the calling game program, that is, the common calling process 1.

  After returning to the common call process 1, the common call process 1 releases the timer interrupt prohibition by setting the value of the interrupt master permission flag to a value indicating the interrupt permission, and saves the game stack area and the SP. Based on the data saved in the area, the register and the stack pointer of the game program are returned to the state before calling the non-game program, and the processing ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game program calls the non-game program, the interrupt is set to be prohibited by the common calling process 1, and when returning from the non-game program to the game program, the interruption of the interrupt is set. Since the prohibition is released, the interrupt can be set to be prohibited during the period in which the non-game program is being executed.

  When the non-game program is called from the main process based on the game program, the non-game program sets various types of processing after first setting the interrupt to be prohibited, and executes the last process of the non-game program. Alternatively, the prohibition of the interrupt may be released. With such a configuration, the interrupt can be set to be prohibited during the period in which the non-game program is executed, as in the present embodiment. Further, since the setting of prohibition and cancellation of the interrupt is performed by the non-game program, it is not necessary to set and cancel the prohibition of the interrupt in the common calling process 1 of the game program, and the capacity of the game program can be reduced. .

  As shown in FIG. 10B, when a non-game program is called from the timer interrupt processing based on the game program, the start address of the non-game program to be called is set in a specific area in the game program, and Execute call processing 2. In the common call process 2, the register of the game program is saved in the game stack area, and the stack pointer (SP, the address indicating the current position of the game stack area) is saved in the SP save area of the game RAM area, and then specified. The non-game program of the address set in the area is called.

  On the other hand, the called non-game program sets the stack pointer of the non-game program, executes the process of the non-game program, and then returns to the common calling process 2 of the caller.

  After returning to the common calling process 2, the common calling process 2 sets the register and the stack pointer of the game program to the state before calling the non-game program based on the data saved in the game stack area and the SP save area. Return and end.

  As described above, in the common call process 2, unlike the call common process 1, the timer interrupt is not set to the prohibition and is not released. However, as described above, the main control unit 41 performs another interrupt while the timer interrupt process is being executed. Since the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited, the interrupt can be prohibited during the period in which the non-game program is being executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the game program executes the common call process 1 and the common call process 2 to call the non-game program and execute the non-game program, the register actually used by the game program is used. Since the process of saving and protecting all areas of the register is performed regardless of whether or not there is, when returning to the game program, it is possible to reliably return from the state at the time the non-game program was called .

  In addition, without executing the common call processing 1 and the common call processing 2, the value of the register used by the game program immediately before the non-game program is called from the processing based on the game program in the game program is protected. After all the processing based on the game program is completed, the value of the protected register may be restored at the first stage of returning to the game program. With such a configuration, the register may be restored before the non-game program is called. Is performed, and the register is restored after returning from the non-game program, so that the data stored in the register by the non-game program does not affect the game program.

  When the non-game program is called, the non-game program first saves the stack pointer and the register of the game program, and restores the stack pointer and the register of the game program at the end of the non-game program. With such a configuration, as in the present embodiment, when returning to the game program, it is possible to reliably return from the state at the time the non-game program was called, and The capacity can be reduced.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can mainly execute a timer interrupt process (main) that interrupts and executes the main process at a constant interval (interval of about 0.56 ms). The timer interrupt process (main) is a process executed by an interrupt generated according to the count of the timer circuit 509. The address where the program of the timer interrupt process (main) is stored is a vector table. Is set as a value corresponding to the timer interrupt. Then, when a timer interrupt occurs, processing from that address is executed. Further, during the execution period of the timer interrupt processing (main), other interrupts are automatically prohibited.

  In the present embodiment, the timer interruption process (main) is included in the game program, while the power interruption determination process, the power interruption command transmission process, the normal command transmission process, which is executed in the timer interruption process (main). The door monitoring process is included in the non-game program. The main control unit 41 sets interrupt prohibition in the timer interrupt process (main), saves the stack pointer and the register of the game program, and The non-gaming program is called. When returning to the timer interrupt processing (main) from the non-game program, the stack pointer and the register of the game program are returned to the state before calling the non-game program, and the subsequent processing is performed. It is supposed to run. Since the main control unit 41 is set to prohibit other interrupts during execution of the interrupt processing, the main control unit 41 executes the subsequent processing in an interrupt prohibited state even after returning from the non-game program. I do.

  In addition, the power failure determination processing, the power transmission command transmission processing, the normal command transmission processing, and the door monitoring processing, which are non-game programs executed in the timer interrupt processing (main), need to be executed before these non-game programs. Processing excluding certain processing (for example, port input processing and motor phase signal output processing that need to be executed before branching of the timer interrupt), that is, whether the processing is performed earlier or later than the non-game program may affect control. It is supposed to be executed before processing that does not exist.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. In addition to executing the main processing based on the program, the main processing can be interrupted at predetermined time intervals to execute the timer interrupt processing (main) based on the game program. It is also possible to call and execute a non-game program from (main).

  In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may malfunction due to execution of the timer interrupt processing (main) during execution of the non-game program.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a game program related to the progress of the game and a non-game program that is a program called by the game program and is not related to the progress of the game. It is possible to execute the main process based on the game program, and to interrupt the main process at predetermined time intervals to execute the timer interrupt process (main) based on the game program. In a configuration in which a non-game program can be called and executed also from the timer interrupt process (main), when the non-game program is called from the main process, the interrupt of another process is set to be prohibited, When calling the non-game program from the timer interrupt processing (main) while calling the non-game program, In other words, when a non-game program is called in a situation where the possibility of an interrupt is further low, the non-game program is called without setting interrupts for other processes to be prohibited. It is possible to reduce the program capacity related to the prohibition of the interrupt while preventing a malfunction due to the execution of the interrupt.

  The timer interrupt processing (main) executed by the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment includes processing by a game program, for example, LED dynamic display processing, output processing of a control signal, and the like, and processing by a non-game program, for example, normal time. It is composed of a plurality of processes including a command transmission process and a command transmission process at the time of power failure. Of the plurality of processes constituting the timer interrupt process (main), a process by a predetermined game program In particular, since the non-game program is called prior to the processing which does not cause any problem if executed before or after the non-game program, that is, a plurality of processes constituting the timer interrupt process (main) The non-game program is called as early as possible, so for example, if the timer interrupt process (main) is Even if the Ma interrupt interrupt had occurred doubly generated, it is possible to prevent the other interrupts during execution of a non-game program from being executed.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a game program and a non-game program, and stores a game stack area for saving data used by the game program and a non-game stack area for saving data used by the non-game program. , Is provided separately, and the main control unit 41 saves the data used by the game program and the data used by the non-game program in the stack areas provided separately. Management becomes easy. In particular, data used by a game program saved by the occurrence of a timer interrupt and data used by a non-game program executed during execution of a timer interrupt process (main) are stored together in one stack area. Since there is no such situation, the management of the stack does not become complicated.

  When executing the non-game program, the main control unit 41 of the embodiment saves the register value used in the game program to the game stack area, calls the non-game program, and executes the processing in the non-game program. When the processing is completed in the non-game program, the saved register value is restored, so that the value of the register used by the game program is prevented from being changed when the non-game program is executed. it can.

  When a non-game program is called from a process based on a game program, a call common process 1 or a call common process 2 for saving a register value used in the game program to the game stack area is called. By sharing a program for executing the non-game program in the processing, the program capacity can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, when the non-game program is called from the processing based on the game program in the main processing, the call common processing 1 is executed, while the non-game program is called from the processing based on the game program in the timer interrupt processing. At this time, the configuration is such that the value of the register used in the game program is saved in the game stack area by executing the call common process 2 different from the call common process 1, but the process based on the game program is performed in the main process. A common call common process may be executed both when a non-game program is called from a game program and when a non-game program is called from a process based on a game program in a timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can call and execute a non-game program from both the main process and the timer interrupt process (main). When calling, the interruption of other processing is set to prohibit, and the non-game program is called, while when calling the non-game program from the timer interruption processing (main), the interruption of other processing is set to prohibition. The main control unit 41 calls the non-gaming program from the main processing, the non-gaming program from the timer interrupt processing (main), etc. May be configured to prohibit the interruption of the process.

  In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 prohibits interruption of other processes not only when calling the non-game program from the main process but also when calling the non-game program from the timer interrupt process (main). Therefore, similarly to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to execution of an interrupt during execution of the non-game program.

  In particular, when the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed, the interrupt prohibition is set, and when the timer interrupt processing (main) ends, the interrupt prohibition is released. Interruption of other processing is prohibited during execution. Even in this case, the interruption of other processing is prohibited again when the non-game program is called from the timer interrupt processing (main). Even if the interrupt prohibition setting is canceled due to a cause, it is possible to prevent malfunction due to execution of the interrupt during execution of the non-game program.

  As described above, when the timer interrupt processing (main) is executed, interrupt prohibition is set, and when the timer interrupt processing (main) is completed, the interrupt prohibition is released. This is a configuration in which interruption of other processing is prohibited during execution of (main). However, when interrupting another processing is prohibited again when a non-game program is called from the timer interruption processing (main). By maintaining the setting of prohibition of interruption of other processing set at the time of calling the non-game program even after the end of the non-game program, the non-game It is possible to prevent the prohibition of the interrupt from being released by executing the program.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment initializes the game RAM area, the unused area 4, and the non-game RAM area when it determines that the storage content of the RAM 41c is destroyed at the start of the setting change process. That is, initialization 0 for initializing all the available areas is performed.

  If it is determined at the start of the setting change process that the storage content of the RAM 41c has not been destroyed, the game RAM area other than the special work, the unused area 4, and the non-game RAM area are initialized. That is, initialization 1 for initializing an area other than the special work in the usable area is performed.

  At the end of the setting change processing, the important work, the general work, the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area are initialized, that is, the special work and the game stack area in the game RAM area. Initialization 2 for initializing an area other than (in use) is performed.

  At the end of a specific game state and at the end of one game, an initialization 3 for initializing a general work, an unused area 3 and a game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area is performed.

  At the end of one game, not at the end of a specific game state, an initialization 4 for initializing an unused area 3 and a game stack area (unused) in the game RAM area is performed.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs the initialization 0 to 4 when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and executes the initialization of the available area of the RAM 41c when the first condition is satisfied as the predetermined condition. Initializing at least a part of the game RAM area in which data used by the game program is stored, and when the second condition is satisfied as a predetermined condition, at least a part of the game RAM area and a usable area of the RAM 41c Initialize at least a part of the non-game RAM area used by the non-game program.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 11, as the first condition, at the end of one game, an unused area 3 and a game stack area (unused), which are part of the game RAM area in the available area. Is initialized, but the non-game RAM area in the usable area is not initialized. As a first condition, at the end of a specific game state, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack area (unused) which are a part of the game RAM area among the available areas are initialized. The non-game RAM area of the possible area is not initialized. Also, as a first condition, after the setting change state ends, the important work, the general work, the unused area 3, and the game stack area (unused) which are a part of the game RAM area among the available areas are initialized. However, the non-game RAM area of the usable area is not initialized.

  On the other hand, as a second condition, when there is no abnormality in the RAM when the setting change state is started, an important work, a general work, an unused area 3, which is a part of the game RAM area in the available area, The game stack area (unused) and the game stack area (used) are initialized, and all areas of the non-game RAM area are initialized. Further, when the setting change state is started, if there is an abnormality in the RAM, all the areas of the game RAM area among the available areas are initialized, and all the areas of the game RAM area are initialized.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can execute a game program related to the progress of a game and a non-game program that is a program called by the game program and that is not related to the progress of the game. A ROM 41b for storing programs is provided.

  In such a configuration, if a game program and a non-game program are mixed in one ROM 41b, it is difficult to determine which program is a program related to the progress of the game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ROM 41b includes a game program area in which a game program is stored and a non-game program area in which a non-game program is stored. Since the areas are separately assigned, the game program and the non-game program can be easily specified according to the difference in the storage area.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is used as a work of a game program, and stores a game RAM area for storing data used by the game program, and a data for use by a non-game program, which is used as a work of a non-game program. A RAM 41c including a non-game RAM area, and a game RAM area and a non-game RAM area are separately allocated in the RAM 41c, so that the data used by the game program and the non-game program And the data can be easily specified according to the difference between the storage areas, and the main control unit 41 initializes at least a part of the game RAM area when the first initialization condition is satisfied, When the initialization condition 2 is satisfied, at least a part of the game RAM area is initialized and To initialize at least a portion of the non-gaming RAM area, it is possible to initialize the appropriate data in accordance with the status of the data used by data and non-game programs used by the game program stored in the RAM 41c.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment initializes the unused area 3 and the game stack area (unused), which are a part of the game RAM area, when one game is completed, as a first initialization condition. As a first initialization condition, when a special game state (BB) ends and one game ends, a general work, an unused area 3, and a game stack, which are a part of the game RAM area, The area (unused) is initialized, and as a first initialization condition, when the setting change is completed and the main processing is started, the area of the important work, the general work, which is a part of the game RAM area, Since the used area 3 and the game stack area (unused) are initialized, appropriate data can be initialized according to the situation.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the important work, the general work, and the unused area which are a part of the game RAM area as the second initialization condition when there is no abnormality in the RAM at the start of the setting change. 3. While initializing the game stack area (unused) and the game stack area (in use), of the non-game RAM area, an area referred to by the game program, an area not referred to by the game program, and a non-game stack area ( The unused RAM and the non-gaming stack area (in use), that is, all the areas of the non-gaming RAM area are initialized. Of these, special work, important work, general work, unused area 3, game stack area (unused) and game stack area (in use), ie, game R In addition to initializing all areas of the M area, of the non-game RAM area, an area referred to by the game program, an area not referred to by the game program, a non-game stack area (unused), and a non-game stack area (in use) That is, in order to initialize all areas of the non-game RAM area, appropriate data is initialized according to the situation among data used by the game program stored in the RAM 41c and data used by the non-game program. can do.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to initialize a part of the game RAM area when the first initialization condition is satisfied. It is only necessary to initialize at least a part of the game RAM area when the initialization condition is satisfied, and all the areas of the game RAM area may be initialized.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to initialize a part of the game RAM area and initialize all areas of the non-game RAM area when the second initialization condition is satisfied. However, the main control unit 41 initializes at least a part of the game RAM area when the second initialization condition is satisfied, and initializes at least a part of the non-game RAM area. Any area may be used to initialize all areas of the game RAM area, all areas of the non-game RAM area may be initialized, or at least a part of the non-game RAM area may be initialized. May be initialized, or all areas of both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area may be initialized.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment configures the program for initializing the game RAM area and the program for initializing the non-game RAM area as separate programs. Since the initialization is not required, the capacity of the game program can be reduced. In addition, the program for initializing the game RAM area can be shared when the first initialization condition is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied. Further, since a program for initializing the game RAM area is provided as a game program, and a program for initializing the non-game RAM area is provided as a non-game program, the game program initializes the non-game RAM area, It is possible to prevent the game program from affecting the non-game program and prevent the non-game program from affecting the game program without initializing the area.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment determines, as the first initialization condition, that it is not the end of the specific game state after performing the game end processing setting in the main processing, that is, one game is ended. By setting the start address of the initialization target RAM at the end of the game when the game is completed and executing the game area initialization processing, a predetermined area of the game RAM area is initialized, so that the game progresses for each game unit. A part of the unnecessary game RAM area can be initialized.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment is activated when the setting key switch 37 is ON and starts the setting change process, that is, the second initialization condition is satisfied based on the fact that the setting change operation has been performed. Then, the game area initialization processing is executed to initialize a predetermined area in the game RAM area, and the non-game area initialization processing is executed to initialize a predetermined area in the non-game RAM area. Thus, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area can be initialized based on the setting change operation (initialization operation) of the game clerk.

  The game RAM area of the RAM 41c of the present embodiment includes an unused area 3 that is not used when performing control based on a game program or control based on a non-game program, and includes a first initialization condition. Since the unused area 3 is initialized both when the second condition is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied, illegal data can be prevented from being stored in the unused area 3.

  In the present embodiment, the unused area 3 is initialized both when the first initialization condition is satisfied and when the second initialization condition is satisfied, but at least when the first initialization condition is satisfied. If the configuration is such that the unused area 3 is initialized when one of the conditions is satisfied when the second initialization condition is satisfied, illegal data can be prevented from being stored in the unused area 3. In addition, if the first initialization condition includes a plurality of conditions, and if at least one of the conditions is satisfied, the unused area 3 is initialized, illegal data is stored in the unused area 3. Can be prevented. The same is true even when the second initialization condition includes a plurality of conditions.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is used as a work of a game program, a game RAM area for storing data used by the game program, and a non-game memory used for work of the non-game program and storing data used by the non-game program. And a RAM 41c including a game RAM area. The RAM 41c has a configuration capable of holding data stored in the RAM 41c for a predetermined period even when power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped by a backup power supply. When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the control unit 41 starts an initial setting process, and determines whether the contents stored in the RAM are normal based on the data stored in the RAM 41c held by the backup power supply. And if it is determined to be normal, the data stored in the RAM 41c is determined. Resume control based on.

  In such a configuration, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, based on the data stored in both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area of the RAM 41c, whether the storage content of the RAM is normal or not is determined. When it is determined whether the control is restarted based on the data stored in the RAM 41c, the load becomes excessive.

  On the other hand, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment starts the initialization processing, and the RAM 41c of the game RAM area of the RAM 41c held by the backup power supply It is determined whether or not the storage content of the RAM is normal based on the parity and the destructive diagnosis data stored in the game RAM area, and when it is determined that the content is normal, the data stored in the game RAM area and the non-game The control is restarted based on the data stored in the RAM area, and whether or not the non-game data stored in the non-game RAM area and not hindering the progress of the game is normal. By omitting the determination, it is possible to reduce the load at the time of restarting the control while ensuring that the progress of the game can be performed normally.

  The game RAM area of the RAM 41c of this embodiment includes an unused area 3 that is not used when performing control based on a game program or control based on a non-game program. The unit 41 executes an initial setting process when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, calculates a RAM parity of the game RAM area including the unused area 3 in the initial setting process, and calculates the calculated RAM. Since it is determined whether the storage content of the game RAM area is normal based on the parity, it is possible to prevent unauthorized data from being stored in the unused area 3.

  When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes an initial setting process, and determines whether or not the storage content of the RAM 41c is destroyed in the initial setting process. If it is determined that the storage contents of the RAM 41c are destroyed, the RAM abnormality flag is set and error processing is controlled. Is ON, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the control is changed to the setting change processing, the game area initialization processing is executed to initialize the game RAM area, and the non-game area initialization. The non-game RAM area is initialized by executing the processing, that is, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are initialized when the error state is released. While game any abnormality has occurred in the RAM area and the non gaming RAM area can be prevented from proceeding.

  When the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the RAM abnormality flag when it is determined in the initial setting processing that the storage content of the RAM 41c is destroyed. After that, the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started with the setting key switch 36 being ON and the setting change processing is executed, so that the error state is released and the game is released. In this configuration, both the RAM area and the non-game RAM area are initialized. However, when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, the main controller 41 destroys the stored contents of the RAM 41c in the initialization processing. If it is determined that the game RAM area has been set, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area may be initialized and error processing may be controlled. In such a configuration, when controlling the error processing, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area are initialized. The game can be prevented from proceeding with the occurrence. In addition, both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area may be initialized when it is determined that the storage content of the RAM 41c is destroyed and when the setting change process is executed thereafter. Even with the configuration, it is possible to prevent the progress of the game with an abnormality occurring in either the game RAM area or the non-game RAM area.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the power interruption processing when the power supply to the slot machine 1 is stopped and the power interruption detection circuit 48 detects a decrease in the power supply voltage. Access to both the game RAM area and the non-game RAM area is prohibited, so use the non-game RAM area that is excluded from the determination as to whether or not data has been destroyed at the next startup. As a result, it is possible to prevent illegal data from being stored.

  Next, the main control unit 41 detects an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game (for example, an abnormality caused by detecting insertion or payout of medals while the reels are rotating, or detecting an insertion of medals during payout processing). The control for outputting a security signal when an abnormality is detected will be described with reference to FIG.

  The insertion error during the reel control process and the payout process may be caused, for example, when a foreign object is inserted from the medal insertion slot 4, when a foreign object exists in the medal channel, or during the reel control process and the payout process. Regardless, it is detected when a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4 flows down to the hopper tank 34a. A payout error during the reel control process is detected when a medal is paid out at a time other than the payout timing.

  In FIG. 12A, the start operation, the reel rotation start, the first stop, the second stop, the third stop, and the payout indicate respective timings during the game progress. Specifically, the start operation indicates a timing at which the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. The start of reel rotation indicates the timing at which the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R start rotating. The first stop indicates a timing at which a stop operation performed first while all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are still rotating is detected. The second stop indicates a state in which the rotation of any one of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R has already stopped, and the two reels are rotating, that is, the timing at which the second stop operation is detected. The third stop indicates a state in which the rotation of the two reels has already stopped and one reel is rotating, that is, the timing at which the third stop operation is detected. The payout indicates the timing at which the payout process of the medal is performed.

  The abnormality detection indicates a timing at which an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game is detected. The medal payout detection indicates the timing at which the paid out medal is detected by the payout sensor 34c. The medal OUT signal is a signal indicating that one medal has been paid out by outputting one pulse. The security signal indicates an output state of a signal (for example, an insertion error signal or a payout error signal) indicating that an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game has occurred.

  FIG. 12A shows a medal payout detection, a medal OUT signal, and a security signal output when an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game is detected during the reel control process and a medal payout occurs. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing timing. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, if an abnormality that does not hinder the progress of the game is detected during the reel control process, the security signal is not output immediately after the abnormality is detected, but the payout process is terminated. The security signal is output before the output of the medal OUT signal is completed. Thereby, it is possible to recognize a medal paid out in a situation where an abnormality occurs during the reel control processing. That is, it is possible to recognize the game value given in a situation where an abnormality has occurred.

  In addition, as is conventionally known, when an abnormality is detected during a game, when an abnormality is notified after the game is completed, when an abnormal signal is output after the processing relating to the game is completed, an “abnormality during the game” is generated. It is not possible to distinguish between "abnormality immediately after the end of the game". However, in this embodiment, when an abnormality is detected at a predetermined timing within a period from the start of the game to the end of the application of the game medium, the output of the medal OUT signal is performed after the end of the application of the game medium. Start output of security signal before completion. Thereby, for example, a hall computer of a game arcade analyzes the output timing of the medal OUT signal and the security signal collected by the collection unit, and the security signal is output before the output of the medal OUT signal is completed. Is detected, it can be distinguished from “abnormality during game”, not “abnormality immediately after game”.

  In FIG. 12A, the medal OUT signal is output after the payout processing is completed. However, for example, as shown in FIG. A signal may be output. In such a case, if the output of the security signal is started before the output of the medal OUT signal is completed, for example, the output of the medal OUT signal corresponding to the detection of the last medal payout is detected. The output of the security signal may be started at the timing.

  Next, the control content of the updating process of the timer counter executed by the main control unit 41 will be described. In the present embodiment, the value of the timer counter assigned to the RAM 41c is periodically updated, and the passage of time is specified by reaching a specific value (0). Conventionally, when measuring a plurality of types of time intervals, a timer value is set and updated in a plurality of types of processing requiring time measurement, and a program for updating the plurality of types of timer values is processed in each processing. In such a case, the program capacity is increased. In addition, since a plurality of types of timer counters are assigned as a data group for each process in which each is used, it is necessary to read the value of an unrelated address in order to update them collectively in one process. there were.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the area in which a plurality of types of timer counter values are stored is set in the RAM 41c as an area to which consecutive addresses are assigned according to a predetermined rule, and the timer value stored in the designated address is set. Since the updating process is repeatedly performed while changing the designated address for the area storing the plurality of types of timer counter values by adding a constant to the current designated address, the plurality of types of timer values are updated. In addition, the program capacity can be reduced as compared with the case where the processing of designating a plurality of types of addresses and updating the values of the addresses is performed by individual processing.

  It should be noted that a plurality of types of timers are updated by repeatedly executing a process of updating the timer value stored at the specified address while changing a specified address for an area storing a plurality of types of timer counter values by performing a predetermined operation. Any configuration that updates the value may be used. Or a value corresponding to the number of processes for the reference address (for example, a 1-byte counter, +1 for 1 process, 2 for 2 processes, and 2 In the case of 3, +3...) Is added or subtracted to change the designated address for the area in which a plurality of types of timer counter values are stored. Ri may be configured to update a plurality of types of the timer value by return run.

  In addition, only a part of the timer counters provided in the main control unit 41 sets the timer value in an area of the RAM 41c to which continuous addresses are assigned according to a predetermined rule, and updates the timer value stored at the specified address. A configuration in which a plurality of types of timer values are updated by performing a predetermined operation while repeatedly changing a designated address for an area in which a plurality of types of timer values are stored and changing the designated address may be used.

  In the present embodiment, a separate timer counter is provided for each type of period to be measured. However, for example, one timer counter may be shared for a plurality of types of periods whose measurement periods do not overlap.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the processing executed by the main control unit 41, a timer interruption processing (main) for periodically performing a predetermined processing irrespective of the progress of the game and a processing in accordance with the progress of the game The main control unit 41 sets an initial value in a timer counter when a timekeeping condition is satisfied in the main processing, and performs a plurality of types of processing in a timer interrupt processing (main). Since the timer value is updated, there is no need to provide a process for updating a plurality of types of timer values in each process constituting the main process. Therefore, the program capacity for updating the plurality of types of timer values is reduced. be able to.

  In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process (main) is executed by periodically interrupting the main process. However, in the timer interrupt process performed periodically, a predetermined timer interrupt process is performed regardless of the progress of the game. The main control unit 41 may be configured to perform both a periodic process for performing the performed process and a main process for performing a process that varies stepwise according to the progress of the game. By setting an initial value to the timer counter when the timing condition is satisfied in the processing and updating a plurality of types of timer values in the periodic processing, a plurality of types of timer values can be stored in each processing constituting the main processing. Since there is no need to provide an updating process, the program capacity for updating a plurality of types of timer values can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the time counter update processing, the value of the designated address is updated on condition that the value of the address is not 0, so that the timer value is updated to an abnormal value. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the time counter update process, the same number of processes as the number of timer counters to be updated are set, and the process of updating the timer value is repeatedly executed by the set number of processes. In addition to simplifying the management of the number of timer counters to be performed, for example, when a plurality of types of timer counters having different update intervals are provided, it is possible to arbitrarily set the type of timer value to be updated according to the number of processes to be set. it can.

  The number of processes, that is, the number of timer counters to be updated may be set in a program, or may be set by reading a value set in a table.

  In addition, the timer counter to be updated last is set in advance without setting the number of processes first, and the timer value is updated repeatedly until the address of the timer counter is reached. A specific end value (for example, FFh) is stored at the next address of the timer counter to be updated, and the process of repeatedly updating the timer value until the value read from the specified address becomes the specific end value may be repeatedly executed. good.

  In this embodiment, a 1-byte timer counter and a 2-byte timer counter are provided, and a process of updating a 1-byte timer value and a process of updating a 2-byte timer value are separately provided. Therefore, the capacity of the program and the capacity occupied by the timer value in the RAM 41c can be reduced as compared with the case where the process of updating the 1-byte timer value and the process of updating the 2-byte timer value are shared.

  In this embodiment, a 2-byte timer counter is provided to measure a relatively long time corresponding to an initial value exceeding 1 byte. For example, a timer counter with a different update interval, for example, a timer By providing a first timer counter that updates once every four times of interrupt processing (main) and a second timer counter that updates once every fourteen times, the relative value can be reduced without providing a 2-byte counter. In such a case, it is not necessary to provide a process of updating the 1-byte timer value and a process of updating the 2-byte timer value. Can reduce the program capacity required for updating the program.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types of timer counters are assigned to the special work that is not initialized in accordance with the progress of the game in the RAM 41c, and are not initialized in accordance with the progress of the game. Regardless of the progress of the game, it is possible to measure the time of the period spanning the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the measurement period is not limited to the timer counter that may straddle the timing at which one game ends, that is, the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized in accordance with the progress of the game. Timer counters that do not straddle the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized in accordance with the progress are stored together with other timer counters in the area allocated to the special work, so that the timer counters can be easily managed. At the same time, a timer counter that does not straddle the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game, and the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game. The use of the timer counter can be easily changed by a later design change, such as changing to a timer counter that can be straddled. It can be. In addition, if the configuration is such that one timer counter is shared for a plurality of types of periods in which the measurement periods do not overlap as described above, the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized may cross over as the game progresses. It is possible to measure the measurement period and the measurement period that does not straddle the timing at which a part of the RAM 41c is initialized according to the progress of the game with one timer counter.

  FIG. 13 to FIG. 15 are diagrams for explaining types of combinations, symbol combinations, and technical matters related to combinations in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a view for explaining a symbol combination at the transitional appearance and technical matters related to the transitional appearance in the slot machine 1 of the embodiment. FIG. 17 is a diagram for explaining transition of the gaming state controlled by the main control unit 41, and FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an outline of the gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the special combination among the winning combinations includes two types of bonuses, a big bonus (hereinafter, the big bonus is referred to as BB) and a regular bonus (hereinafter, the regular bonus is referred to as RB). BB is won when the combination of "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7" is completed on the pay line LN at RT0 to RT4. When the player wins a BB, the game shifts to a big bonus that is controlled by a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as an RB) in each game. Then, the big bonus ends on condition that 316 or more medals have been paid out. The RB is awarded when the combination of “blue 7-red 7-red 7” is aligned on the pay line LN in RT0 to RT4. When the player wins the RB, the game is transferred to a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB). The regular bonus is terminated on condition that one of the winning combinations wins six times or that 12 games are completed. As shown in FIG. 17, after winning either BB or RB until winning, the control is controlled by RT4, and after the big bonus or the regular bonus (collectively referred to as a bonus) ends, the control is controlled by RT3. The Rukoto.

  As shown in FIG. 14, among the winning combinations, the small combinations include the upper bell 1, the upper bell 2, the upper bell 3, the upper bell 4, the upper bell 5, the upper bell 6, the upper bell 7, the upper bell 8, and the middle bell. , Falling bell, middle watermelon, falling watermelon, corner cherry 1 and corner cherry 2. Hereinafter, when it is not necessary to distinguish the upper bell 1, the upper bell 2, the upper bell 3, the upper bell 4, the upper bell 5, the upper bell 6, the upper bell 7, and the upper bell 8, they are simply referred to as an upper bell. .

  The upper bell 1 displays “Replay a-Cherry a-Cherry a”, “Replay a-Cherry a-White 7”, “Replay a-Cherry a-BAR”, “Replay a -Cherry b-Cherry a "," Replay a-Cherry b-White 7 ", and" Replay a-Cherry b-BAR "combination win a prize, and the upper bell 1 wins in any game state Sometimes eight medals are paid out. The upper bell 2 is awarded when the combination of “Replay a-Cherry a-plum” and “Replay a-Cherry b-Plum” is completed on the pay line LN in any game state, and in any game state When the upper bell 2 wins, eight medals are paid out. The upper bell 3 is displayed when the combination of “Replay a-plum-cherry a”, “Replay a-plum-white 7”, and “Replay a-plum-BAR” is completed on the payline LN in any game state. When the upper bell 3 wins in any of the gaming states, eight medals are paid out. The upper bell 4 is awarded when the combination of “replay a-plum-plum” is completed on the winning line LN in any game state, and eight medals are obtained when the upper bell 4 wins in any game state. Will be paid out. The upper bell 5 displays “Replay b-Cherry a-Cherry a”, “Replay b-Cherry a-White 7”, “Replay b-Cherry a-BAR”, “Replay b” in the winning line LN in any game state. -Cherry b-Cherry a "," Replay b-Cherry b-White 7 ", and" Replay b-Cherry b-BAR "combination win a prize, and the upper bell 5 wins in any game state Sometimes eight medals are paid out. The upper bell 6 is awarded when the combination of “Replay b-Cherry a-plum” and “Replay b-Cherry b-plum” is completed on the pay line LN in any game state, and in any game state, When the upper bell 6 wins, eight medals are paid out. The upper bell 7 is displayed when the combination of “Replay b-plum-cherry a”, “Replay b-plum-white 7”, and “Replay b-plum-BAR” is completed on the pay line LN in any game state. When the top bell 7 wins in any game state, eight medals are paid out. The upper bell 8 is awarded when the combination of “replay a-plum-plum” is completed on the pay line LN in any game state, and eight medals are obtained when the upper bell 8 wins in any game state. Will be paid out. The combination of the symbols constituting the upper bell 1 to the upper bell 8 is aligned with the winning line LN, so that the combination of "bell-bell-bell" can be aligned with the invalid line LM1.

  The middle bell is awarded when the combination of "bell-bell-bell" is completed on the pay line LN in any game state, and eight medals are paid out when the middle bell wins in any game state. . The downward sloping bell indicates “Replay a-Bell-Red 7”, “Replay a-Bell-Replay a”, “Replay b-Bell-Red 7”, “Replay b-Bell” in the winning line LN in any game state. When the combination of “-replay a” is completed, a prize is won, and in any game state, when a downward-sloping bell wins, eight medals are paid out.

  The middle watermelon wins when the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is completed on the pay line LN in any game state, and five medals are paid out when the middle watermelon wins in any game state. . The downward-sloping watermelon is awarded when the combination of "bell-watermelon-cherry b" is aligned on the pay line LN in any game state, and 5 medals when the downward-sloping watermelon wins in any gaming state. Will be paid out. When the combination of the symbols constituting the downward-sloping watermelon is aligned with the winning line LN, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be aligned with the invalid line LM3.

  The corner cherry 1 wins when the combination of “red 7-bell-bell” and “BAR-bell-bell” is aligned in the winning line LN in any game state, and the corner cherry is won in any game state. When a prize is won, one medal is paid out. The corner cherry 2 is awarded when the combination of “red 7-bell-replay a” and “BAR-bell-replay a” is completed in the pay line LN in any game state, and in any game state, When the cherry 2 wins, one medal is paid out.

  As shown in FIG. 15, among the winning combinations, the replaying combinations include a middle replay, an upward replay, a promotion replay, a fall replay, a special replay, a red seven-matched replay, a blue seven-matched replay, a lost replay a, and a lost replay b. Is included.

  The middle replay is a winning when the combination of “replay a-replay a-replay a” and “replay b-replay a-replay a” is completed on the pay line LN at RT0 to RT4, and the replay game (replay game) is performed. Granted. The upward replay is a winning when the combination of "Bell-Replay a-Red 7" or "Bell-Replay a-Bell" is completed on the pay line LN at RT1 to RT4, and a replay game (replay game) is given. You. In the promotion replay, when the combination of "bell-replay a-replay a" is completed on the pay line LN at RT1, a winning is achieved, and a replay game (replay game) is given. The fall replays are “Bell-Red 7-Cherry a”, “Bell-Red 7-watermelon”, “Bell-Red 7-plum”, “Bell-watermelon-Cherry a”, Wins when the combination of "Bell-watermelon-watermelon", "Bell-watermelon-plum", "Bell-cherry a-cherry a", "Bell-cherry a-watermelon", and "Bell-cherry a-plum" is completed , And a replay game (replay) is provided. The special replay is a winning when the combination of “replay a-replay a-bell” and “replay b-replay a-bell” is completed on the pay line LN at RT0, and a replay game (replay) is given. The red-matched replay is a winning when the combination of “replay b-blue 7-replay a” is completed on the pay line LN at RT2, and a replay game (replay game) is given. The Blue 7 matching replay is a winning when the combination of "Cherry a-Blue 7-Replay a" is aligned on the pay line LN at RT2, and a replay game (replay) is given. The missing replay a wins when the combination of “replay a-blue 7-replay a” is completed on the pay line LN at RT2, and a replay game (replay game) is given. The missed replay b wins when the combination of "bell-blue 7-replay a" is completed on the pay line LN at RT2, and a replay game (replay) is given.

  The combination of “Replay b-Blue 7-Replay a” that constitutes the replay of Red 7 is aligned with the winning line LN, so that the combination of “Red 7-Red 7-Red 7” can be aligned with the invalid line LM2. In addition, since the combination of “Cherry a-Blue 7-Replay a” constituting the replay of Blue 7 is aligned with the pay line LN, the combination of “Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7” can be aligned with the invalid line LM4.

  As shown in FIG. 16, the outcome of the transition is “Replay a-cherry a-bell”, “Replay a-cherry b-bell”, “Replay a-plum-bell”, “Replay b-cherry a-bell” , "Replay b-cherry b-bell", "Replay b-plum-bell", "Replay a-bell-cherry a", "Replay a-bell-white 7", "Replay a-bell-BAR", " "Replay a-bell-plum", "Replay b-bell-cherry a", "Replay b-bell-white 7", "Replay b-bell-BAR", "Replay b-bell-plum", "Bell-cherry" "a-cherry a", "bell-cherry a-white 7", "bell-cherry a-BAR", "bell-cherry a-plum", "bell-cherry b-cherry a", "bell-cherry b- White 7 "," Bel-Chip Combination of "lee b-BAR", "bell-cherry b-plum", "bell-plum-cherry a", "bell-plum-white 7", "bell-plum-BAR", "bell-plum-plum" In RT0, RT2, and RT3, when the transition outcome is aligned with the pay line LN, the process proceeds to RT1. In this embodiment, the left bells 1-4, the middle bells 1-4, and the right bells 1-4 are won, the reels which are the winning conditions of the middle bell are set to the first stop, and the winning upper bell is dropped. In this case, the transition outcome is aligned with the pay line LN.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23, a description will be given of combinations of lottery target combinations that are read as lottery target combinations for each gaming state. In the present embodiment, a role or a role to be subjected to an internal lottery depending on whether the gaming state is RT1, RT2, RT3, RT4, or RB (including RB in BB). At least one of the winning probabilities is different. As will be described later, as a lottery target combination, a plurality of winning combinations can be read at the same time, and can be repeatedly won. In FIGS. 19 to 21, the vertical column indicates the lottery target combination, and the horizontal column indicates the gaming state. In the column where the gaming state and the lottery target role intersect, a circle mark indicates that the lottery target role is in the game state, and a cross mark is not a lottery target role in the game state. To the effect. Numerical values shown below the circles indicate the number of judgment values of a predetermined set value (common in this embodiment regardless of the set value). An internal lottery is performed using the number of determination values. The denominator of the determination value number is set to “65536” in correspondence with the random number for the internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 65535). Therefore, for example, the winning probability of the lottery target combination for which “300” is set as the determination value number is 300/65536. 19 shows combinations of special combinations read as lottery targets for each gaming state, FIG. 20 shows combinations of small roles read as lottery targets for each game state, and FIG. The combination of the replaying combination read as the combination is shown. 22 to 23, "+" is written between winning combinations to indicate that they are read out simultaneously as the lottery target combinations in the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RT0, BB, BB + strong cherry, BB + weak cherry, BB + watermelon, BB + common bell, RB, RB + weak cherry, RB + watermelon, RB + common bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, Left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, normal replay, The replay GR11, the replay GR12, the replay GR13, the replay GR14, the replay GR15, and the replay GR16 are targets of the internal lottery. When the gaming state is RT1, BB, BB + strong cherry, BB + weak cherry, BB + watermelon, BB + common bell, RB, RB + weak cherry, RB + watermelon, RB + common bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, Left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, normal replay, The replay GR1, the replay GR2, the replay GR3, the replay GR4, the replay GR5, and the replay GR6 are targets of the internal lottery. When the gaming state is RT2, BB, BB + strong cherry, BB + weak cherry, BB + watermelon, BB + common bell, RB, RB + weak cherry, RB + watermelon, RB + common bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, Left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, normal replay, The replay GR21, the replay GR22, the replay GR23, and the promotion replay are targets of the internal lottery. When the gaming state is RT3, BB, BB + strong cherry, BB + weak cherry, BB + watermelon, BB + common bell, RB, RB + weak cherry, RB + watermelon, RB + common bell, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, Left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, right bell 4, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, normal replay Becomes a target role of internal lottery. When the gaming state is RT4, left bell 1, left bell 2, left bell 3, left bell 4, middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, middle bell 4, right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell. 3, Right Bell 4, Strong Cherry, Weak Cherry, Watermelon, Common Bell, and Normal Replay are eligible for internal lottery. When the gaming state is RB, the strong cherry, the weak cherry, the watermelon, and the common bell are targeted for the internal lottery.

  The left bell 1-4, the middle bell 1-4, the right bell 1-4, the common bell, the strong cherry, the weak cherry, and the watermelon are each a combination or combination of combinations shown in FIG. In the following, when there is no particular need to distinguish, the left bells 1 to 4 are simply called left bells, the middle bells 1 to 4 are simply called middle bells, and the right bells 1 to 4 are simply called right bells. There is. When it is not necessary to distinguish the left bells 1-4, the middle bells 1-4, and the right bells 1-4, they may be simply referred to as a pushing order bell.

  The normal replay, the replay GR1 to 6, the replay GR11 to 16, and the replay GR21 to 23 are each a combination of roles shown in FIG. Hereinafter, when it is not necessary to distinguish any of the replays GR1 to 6, the replays GR11 to 16, and the replays GR21 to GR23, they may be simply referred to as a push order replay.

  In the present embodiment, when the pressing order bell has been won, as shown in FIG. 24, the combination of symbols to be stopped differs according to the type of the pressing order bell and the stop order. For example, when the left bell 1 (middle bell + upper bell 1 + upper bell 8) is won and a stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the left reel is the first stop, the combination of the middle bell stops at the winning line LN. However, when the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the middle reel is the first stop or the stop order in which the right reel is the first stop, any of the combination of the upper bell 1 and the upper bell 8 or the transition appearance is performed. It stops at the pay line LN. The same applies to the left bells 2 to 4, the middle bells 1 to 4, and the right bells 1 to 4, and as shown in FIG.

  In detail, when the push order bell is won and the stop operation of the reel, in which the middle bell wins as the first stop, is performed, the symbol of the bell is stopped in the middle stage of the reel, and then the remaining bell is stopped. By performing the reel stop operation, the "bell" is also stopped at the middle stage of the remaining reels, and the combination of the middle stage bells is aligned with the winning line LN.

  On the other hand, if the push order bell is won and the stop operation of the reels other than the reel in which the middle bell wins as the first stop is performed, the first stop reel and the second stop reel are won. Of the upper bell (left bell 1 is “Replay a” or “Replay b” on the left reel, “Cherry a”, “Cherry b” or “plum” on the middle reel, and "Cherry a", "White 7", "BAR" or "Plum") can be stopped at the middle stage, and when the two reels stop, the winning upper stage bell can be stopped at the winning line LN. (If left bell 1, "Replay a-Cherry a / Cherry b-Rotating", "Replay a-Rotating-Cherry a / White 7 / BAR", "Replay b-Plum-Rotating , "Replay b-Rotating-Plum"), and if the stop operation of the third stop reel is performed at a timing at which the winning symbol of the upper bell can be drawn in, the middle stage of the third stop reel The stopped design of the upper bell is stopped, the combination of the selected upper bells is aligned with the pay line LN, and the third stopped reel is stopped at a timing other than the timing at which the drawn design of the upper bell can be drawn. If the stop operation has been performed, the “bell” is stopped at the middle stage of the third stop reel, and the combination of the transitions (for the left bell 1, “replay a-cherry a / cherry b-bell”, "Replay a-bell-cherry a / white 7 / BAR", "replay b-plum-bell", "replay b-bell-plum") are aligned with the winning line LN. Further, when the two reels stop, the winning upper row bell cannot be stopped on the winning line LN (if the left bell is 1, "replay b-cherry a / cherry b-rotating", " "Replay b-Rotating-Cherry a / White 7 / BAR", "Replay a-Plum-Rotating", "Replay a-Rotating-Plum"), the timing of the stop operation of the third stop reel Regardless of this, the "bell" is stopped at the middle stage of the third stop reel, and the combination of the transition outcome (for the left bell 1, "replay b-cherry a / cherry b-bell", "replay b-bell-" Cherry a / White 7 / BAR ”,“ Replay a-plum-bell ”,“ Replay a-bell-plum ”) are aligned with the winning line LN. Further, when the transition outcomes are aligned with the pay line LN, combinations of “bell-bell-other than bell”, “bell-other-bell-bell”, and “bell-other-bell-bell” are aligned in the invalid line LM1.

  For this reason, at the time of winning of the pushing order bell, the expected value of the number of medals to be paid out can be changed depending on whether the operation is performed in the stop order according to the type of the pushing order bell. That is, even if one of the push order bells is won, if the type is not known, the stop order corresponding to the type cannot be intentionally selected, and if the stop order matches, the middle bell is reliably won. By doing so, medals can be obtained reliably, but medals can only be obtained at a certain rate unless the stop order matches. In particular, in the case of RT0 and RT2, when the stop order does not match, the transition roll stops, so if the stop order does not match, the process shifts to RT1 at a fixed rate. In this embodiment, even if the stop operation is performed in any stop order, the middle bell wins at an equal ratio and eight medals can be obtained, so that the player performs the stop operation in any stop order. However, it is possible to prevent an extremely disadvantageous situation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, even if the stop operation is performed in any stop order, the transition roll can be stopped. There is no timing for avoiding the appearance, and the stop of the transition appearance cannot be intentionally avoided unless the type of the pushing order bell is known.

  In the present embodiment, when the pressing order bell is won, if the stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the operation mode in which the middle bell or the upper bell can be won, the transitional outcome is always stopped. However, when the pressing order bell is won, if a stop operation is performed in an operation mode in which the middle bell or the upper bell cannot be won, a transition rollout or a loss, that is, a symbol in which no winning occurs occurs A configuration in which the combination of symbols that are combinations and are not the combination of the symbols that constitute the transition roll may be stopped.

  In the present embodiment, when the replays GR1 to GR6 have been won, as shown in FIG. 25, the combination of symbols to be stopped differs according to the type and the order of stop. For example, when the replay GR1 (middle replay + promotion replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the stop order of the left middle right, the promotion replay combination stops on the payline LN and the stop order other than the left middle right , The middle replay combination stops at the payline LN. The same applies to the replays GR2 to GR6, and as shown in FIG. 25, the combinations of the symbols to be stopped differ according to the types and the stop order. For this reason, at the time of winning the replays GR1 to 6 in the RT1, the promotion replay wins by being operated in the stop order according to the type, but if the type is not known, the stop order according to the type is intentionally selected. If the stop order matches, the promotion replay can be won to move to RT0, but if the stop order does not match, RT1 is maintained. In this embodiment, since the promotion replay wins at an equal rate and shifts to RT0 even if the stop operation is performed in any stop order, no matter in which stop order the player performs the stop operation, Can be prevented from becoming disadvantageous.

  In the present embodiment, when the replays GR11 to GR16 have been won, as shown in FIG. 26, the combinations of symbols to be stopped differ according to their types and stop order. For example, when the replay GR11 (special replay + middle replay + falling replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel being the first stop, the combination of the middle replay stops on the pay line LN, When the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the middle reel is set to the first stop, the special replay combination is stopped in the pay line LN, and the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the right reel is set to the first stop. Means that the combination of fall replay stops at the payline LN. When the replay GR12 (special replay + middle replay + falling replay + upward replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel being the first stop, the combination of the middle replay is stopped at the pay line LN. However, when the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the middle reel is set to the first stop, the combination of the fall replay stops on the payline LN, and the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the right reel is set to the first stop. In this case, the special replay combination stops at the pay line LN. When the replay GR13 (special replay + middle replay + falling replay + red 7 replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel being the first stop, the combination of the fall replay is displayed on the winning line LN. When the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the reels are stopped and the middle reel is set to the first stop, the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the combination of the middle replay stops at the payline LN and the right reel is set to the first stop. In this case, the special replay combination stops at the payline LN. When the replay GR14 (special replay + middle replay + falling replay + red 7 replay + right-up replay) is won and a stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel being the first stop, the special replay combination is When the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the stop at the pay line LN and the middle reel is the first stop, the combination of the middle replay stops at the pay line LN, and the stop is performed with the right reel as the first stop. When the stop operation is performed, the combination of the fall replay stops on the pay line LN. When the replay GR15 (special replay + middle replay + falling replay + blue 7 replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel being the first stop, the combination of the special replay is displayed on the winning line LN. When a stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the reels are stopped and the middle reel is set to the first stop, the combination of the falling replays is stopped at the payline LN, and the stop operation is performed in the stop order in which the right reel is set to the first stop. In this case, the middle replay combination stops at the payline LN. If the replay GR16 (special replay + middle replay + fall replay + blue 7-match replay + right up replay) is won and the stop operation is performed in the stop order with the left reel as the first stop, the combination of fall replay When the stop operation is performed in the stop sequence in which the stop is performed on the pay line LN and the middle reel is set to the first stop, the combination of the special replays is stopped in the pay line LN, and the stop is performed with the right reel being the first stop. When the stop operation is performed, the combination of the middle replay stops on the pay line LN.

  For this reason, when the replays GR11 to GR16 are won at RT0, the special replay is won by being operated in the stop order according to the type, but if the type is not known, the stop order according to the type is intentionally performed. Cannot be selected, and if the operated stop order matches the stop order corresponding to the middle replay, it is possible to maintain the RT0 by winning the middle replay and match the stop order corresponding to the special replay. Then, the special replay can be shifted to RT2 by winning, but if the stop order corresponding to the middle replay does not match the stop order corresponding to the special replay, the falling replay wins and shifts to RT1. Sometimes. In this embodiment, even if the stop operation is performed in any stop order, the middle replay wins at an equal ratio and RT0 is maintained, the special replay wins, the process moves to RT2, and the fall replay wins. In this case, even if the player performs the stop operation in any stop order, it is possible to prevent an extremely disadvantageous situation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, RT0 is maintained in a case where the replay GRs 11 and 12 are won in the RT0, a case where the replay GRs 13 and 14 are won in the RT0, and a case where the replay GRs 15 and 16 are won in the RT0. The stop order (first stop reel) for winning the replay and the stop order (first stop reel) for winning the special replay that shifts to RT2 are different. Further, when the replay GR11 and the replay GR12 are won in the RT0, the stop order (first stop reel) for winning the middle replay in which the RT0 is maintained is the same, but the replay GR11 and the replay GR12 are the same. Is different in the stop order (first stop reel) for winning the special replay that shifts to RT2 in the case of winning. The same applies to the case where the replay GRs 13 and 14 are won at RT0 and the case where the replay GRs 15 and 16 are won at RT0. For this reason, even if the stop order for winning the middle replay in which RT0 is maintained is specified, the stop order for winning the special replay that shifts to RT2 from the stop order cannot be specified.

  In the present embodiment, when the replays GR21 to GR23 have been won, as shown in FIG. 26, the combinations of symbols to be stopped differ according to their types and stop order. For example, the replay GR21 (red 7-matched replay + missing replay a + middle replay) is won, and stops in the stop order of the right, middle, and left reels, and at a timing at which the symbols constituting the red 7-matched replay can be stopped in the middle of the reels. When the operation is performed, the combination of the seven red replays stops at the payline LN, and the symbols constituting the red seven replays are stopped in the middle of the reels in the stop order of the right center left reel and the right middle reel. When a stop operation is performed at a timing that can be performed, and a stop operation is performed at a timing where it is not possible to stop the symbols constituting the replay of red 7 in the middle stage of the reel on the left reel, the combination of the missing replay a is a winning line LN. In the stop order of the right center left reel and the right reel in a red 7 If the stop operation is performed at a timing that can stop at the middle stage of the reel, and the stop operation is performed at a timing that cannot stop the symbols constituting the replay of seven reds on the middle left reel at the middle stage of the reel, a combination of the middle replay Stops on the payline LN, and the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the stop order of the right, middle, and left reels, the middle replay combination stops on the payline LN.

  In addition, the replay GR22 (red 7-matched replay + blue 7-matched replay + drop-out replay a + middle-stage replay) is won, and the symbols constituting the red 7-matched replay and blue 7-matched replay in the stop order of the right, middle, and left reels and on each reel. If the stop operation is performed at a timing when the player can stop the middle of the reel, the combination of the seven blue replays or the combination of the seven blue replays is stopped at the pay line LN while the blue seven replay combinations are prioritized. In the stop order of the center left reel, the stop operation is performed at the timing at which the symbols constituting the red 7 replay and blue 7 replay can be stopped at the middle stage of the reel for the right center reel, and the red 7 replay, blue for the left reel. When a stop operation is performed at a timing when the symbols constituting the 7-set replay cannot be stopped at the middle stage of the reel The combination of the missing replay a stops at the payline LN, and stops in the stop order of the right, middle, and left reels, and the right reel stops at the timing at which the symbols constituting the 7 replays of red and the 7 replays of blue can be stopped at the middle stage of the reels. If the player performs a stop operation at a timing at which it is not possible to stop the symbols that constitute the 7-row replay and the 7-blue replay for the middle left reel in the middle row of the reel, the combination of the middle replay is a winning line. When stopping at LN and performing a stop operation in a stop order other than the stop order of the right middle left reel, the middle replay combination stops at the payline LN.

  In addition, the replay GR23 (missing replay b + middle replay) is won, and the symbols constituting the missed replay b are arranged in the stop order of the right middle left reel and the right middle reel (symbols comprising red 7-matched replay and blue 7-matched replay). If the stop operation is performed at a timing when the stop can be stopped at the middle stage of the reel, the combination of the missed replay b stops at the payline LN, and the missed replay b is stopped in the stop order of the right middle left reel and the right middle reel. If the stop operation is performed at a timing at which the symbols constituting the symbol cannot be stopped at the middle stage of the reel, the combination of the middle replay stops at the pay line LN and stops in a stop order other than the stop order of the right center left reel. When the operation is performed, the combination of the middle replay stops at the pay line LN.

  In the present embodiment, even when the stop operation is performed in the stop order of the right, center, and left reels and a red 7-matched replay or a blue 7-matched replay is won, the stop operation is performed in the stop order of the right, middle, and left reels, and the data is missed. In the case where the replay a and the middle replay are won, the replay is similarly provided, so that there is no disadvantage even if the player performs the stop operation in any stop order.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the control is performed to any one of RT0 to RT4 and a bonus (RB, RB in BB). RT0 shifts by winning a promotion replay in RT1 and RT2. Regarding RT0, regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT0, the transition to RT1 due to the prize of the fall replay or the stop of the transition, the transition to RT2 due to the special replay, or the special role is won. Then, the process ends by shifting to RT4. The payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100% when the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification, but becomes 100% or less when the navigation notification is not executed. RT1 shifts due to a win in a fall replay or a stop at the shift at RT0, RT2, and RT3. Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT1, RT1 is terminated by transitioning to RT0 due to the promotion prize winning or transitioning to RT4 due to the winning of the special role. The payout rate of medals per game is less than 100%. RT2 shifts by winning a special replay at RT0. Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT2, RT2 transitions to RT0 when a promotion replay is won, transitions to RT1 when the transition stops, or transitions to RT4 when a special role is won. That ends. The payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100% when the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification, but becomes 100% or less when the navigation notification is not executed. RT3 shifts when the bonus (BB, RB) ends. Then, regardless of the number of games after the transition to RT3, RT3 ends by transitioning to RT1 by stopping the transition or transitioning to RT4 by winning the special role. The payout rate of medals per game is less than 100%. RT4 shifts by winning a special role (BB, RB) in RT0 to RT3. Then, regardless of the number of games since the transition to RT4, RT4 ends when the special role that triggered the transition to RT4 wins and transitions to a bonus (BB or RB). The payout rate of medals per game is less than 100% both when the stop operation is performed in the stop order according to the navigation notification and when the navigation notification is not executed. The RB shifts due to the winning of the RB at RT4. Then, the RB ends when the 12 games are consumed or the prize is won six times. The payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100%. BB shifts due to BB winning at RT4. Then, the BB ends when the total number of medals paid out during the BB exceeds the specified number (316 in the present embodiment) regardless of the number of games since the shift to the BB. The payout rate of medals per game exceeds 100%.

  Among RT0 to RT4, RB, BB (RB), RB and BB have the highest payout rate of medals per game and are the most advantageous gaming state. In addition, RT0, RT2, and RT4 among RT0, RT4, and RT4 have a higher probability of winning a re-playing role and a higher medal payout rate per game than RT1,3. This is an advantageous state for the player. RT0, RT2 among RT0, RT2, RT4 can be said to be more advantageous for the player than RT4 in that the payout rate of medals per game is higher than RT4. In addition, RT2 can be said to be more advantageous to the player than RT0 in that it is highly likely that the number of ART games described later will be added.

  Further, in the slot machine of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is RT0 to RT2, the main control unit 41 can execute the navigation notification for notifying the stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result. Control can be performed during an assist time (hereinafter, referred to as AT) serving as a notification period.

  When controlled by the AT, the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification by winning the notification target combination corresponding to the gaming state, and also issues a first internal winning command to the sub control unit 91. By transmitting the second internal winning command and the pressing order command, the sub control unit 91 executes the navigation effect. The notification target combination according to the game state is the replay GR1 to 6, the pushing order bell when it is RT1, the replay GR11 to 16, the pushing order bell when it is RT0, and the replay GR21 to 26, when it is RT2. It is a push order bell. Further, in the present embodiment, even in the normal state (RT1 and non-AT state) in which neither the AT nor the ART is controlled, the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification by satisfying a certain condition. , It is possible to execute a navigation effect. In the navigation notification of the present embodiment, by changing the lighting mode of the game auxiliary display 12, a stop order advantageous to the player is notified so as to be distinguishable. The mode of the navigation notification will be described later in detail.

  In the navigation effect according to the present embodiment, the stop order advantageous to the player notified by the navigation notification is notified by displaying the navigation image from the liquid crystal display 51 and outputting the navigation sound from the speakers 53 and 54. For example, in order to notify the stop order of the center left and right, the stop switch 8L such as “123” (indicating that the left reel is the first stop, the middle reel is the second stop, and the right reel is the third stop), A stop order image indicating the stop order of 8C and 8R is displayed. As the navigation sound, for example, a sound indicating the stop order of the stop switch such as “left center right!” (The left reel indicates the first stop, the middle reel indicates the second stop, and the right reel indicates the third stop). Is output. When the stop order in which the left reel is set to the first stop is notified, the stop order of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R such as "1-" (indicating that the left reel is set to the first stop) is indicated. Display the stop order image. As the navigation sound, for example, a sound indicating the stop order of the stop switch such as “left!” (Indicating that the left reel is in the first stop) (indicating that the left reel is in the first stop) is output. I do. In particular, when the replay GRs 21 to 26 are won in RT2 and the stop order in which the red 7 match replay, the red 7 drop replay or the blue 7 match replay, and the blue 7 drop replay wins is notified, the stop order image described above is used. In addition, an image prompting a stop operation at the timing of aiming at red 7 and blue 7 is displayed on each reel, and the stop operation at that timing is encouraged. It should be noted that the mode of the navigation effect is not limited to such a mode, and any mode may be used as long as the player can distinguish according to the winning situation. The navigation effect is not limited to the one using the liquid crystal display 51 and the speakers 53 and 54, but may be the one using the effect LED 52, the reel LED 55 and the like.

  In the navigation notification and the navigation effect, when any one of the replays GR1 to GR6 is won at RT1, the stop order in which the promotion replay wins is notified so as to be identifiable. Further, when any of the replays GR11 to GR16 is won in RT0, the stop order in which the middle replay or the special replay is won is notified so as to be identifiable. Further, when any of the replays GR21 to GR23 has been won in RT2, the stop order in which the red 7-matched replay, the blue 7-matched replay, the missed replay a or the missed replay b can be awarded is notified in an identifiable manner. .

  As described above, in the navigation notification and the navigation effect, the stop order that is advantageous to the player is notified so as to be identifiable. For this reason, by performing a stop operation in the stop order according to the navigator effect, the player can intentionally win the promotion replay at RT1 and shift to RT0, and win the middle bell, and Winning the middle replay and maintaining RT0, winning the special replay and shifting to RT2, avoiding the falling replay winning, winning the middle bell, and avoiding the stop at the transition It is possible to avoid the replay of seven red matches, seven replays of blue, missed replay a or missed replay b, the middle bell, and stop of the transition at RT2.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls the ART (in the state controlled by the AT at RT0) when the lottery condition is satisfied (in this embodiment, the strong cherry, the weak cherry, the watermelon, and the common bell are won). An ART lottery for deciding whether or not to do so is performed. In addition, the main control unit 41 can control for a predetermined period (the number of games) a precursor period indicating the possibility of winning in the ART lottery, and determines the length of the precursor period according to the result of the ART lottery. A lottery period is drawn. Then, the main control unit 41 wins the ART lottery and controls the ART when the precursor period determined by the precursor period lottery elapses.

  When controlling to ART, control is first performed to AT. The state from the start of the AT control to the transition to RT0 is also referred to as a preparation state. In the preparation state, the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification when the target combination is won. At this time, in the RT1, when the replays GR1 to GR6 are won, the navigation notification is performed, and when the replays GR1 to GR6 are won, the stop order for winning the promotion replay is notified by the navigation notification. By performing the operation, it becomes possible to win the promotion replay and shift from RT1 to RT0. In addition, after shifting to the preparation state, the stop order for winning the middle bell at the time of winning the push order bell is notified, so that by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order, eight medals are reliably obtained. It becomes possible.

  The main control unit 41 ends the preparation state by winning the promotion replay at RT1, and starts the control of the ART. Accordingly, the main control unit 41 sets the predetermined number of games as the number of remaining ART games allocated to the RAM 91c, and starts counting the number of remaining ART games. After the ART is started, the stop order for winning the middle bell at the time of winning the push order bell is notified, so that by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order, it is possible to reliably obtain eight medals. At the same time, it is possible to avoid the stop of the transition and the winning of the fall replay, and the transition to RT1. In addition, in a case where the additional state lottery described below has not been won, the stop order for winning the middle replay at the time of winning the replay GR11 to 16 is notified by the navigation notification, so that the stop operation is performed in accordance with the notified stop order. As a result, it becomes possible to win the middle replay and maintain RT0.

  After the start of the ART, the remaining game number is decremented by one each time one game is consumed, and when the remaining game number becomes zero, the control of the AT is ended. As a result, the navigation notification is not executed, so that it is impossible to avoid the stop of the transition at the time of winning the push order bell, and to avoid the winning of the fall replay at the time of winning the replay GR11 to GR16. Is stopped or a fall replay wins, and a transition to RT1 completes a series of control of AT and ART.

  Further, if the lottery condition (win of strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell) is satisfied before the number of remaining games becomes 0 after the start of ART, it is determined whether or not to increase the number of games in ART. Perform an additional lottery. When the additional lottery is won, an ART game number lottery for determining the number of ART games is performed, and the number of games won in the ART game number lottery is added to the remaining game number of the ART.

  In addition, if the lottery condition (win of strong cherry) is satisfied before the number of remaining games becomes 0 after the start of the ART, the state is shifted to the additional state where the probability that the number of the ART games is added is higher than during the ART. An additional state lottery for deciding whether or not to do so is performed. Then, in the case of winning in the additional state lottery, the stop order for winning the special replay at the time of winning the replay GR11 to 16 is notified by the navigation notification, and the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop order. It becomes possible to win the special replay and shift to RT2.

  If the process moves to RT2 due to the winning in the additional state lottery, the ART is interrupted, the counting of the number of games in the ART is also interrupted, and the system moves to the additional state. The additional state is continued until the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery described later, and during that time, lottery conditions (in the present embodiment, all small roles, replay GR21 in the internal lottery or the second lottery) , Every time a replay GR22 is won), an additional lottery is performed, and the number of games won in the additional lottery is added to the remaining game number of the ART. In particular, when the winning of the red 7 matching replay and the blue 7 matching replay is allowed, that is, when the replay GR21 and the replay GR22 are won, the winning of the red 7 matching replay and the blue 7 matching replay is not allowed, that is, Is set so that the average number of games to be won in the additional lottery is higher than when the lottery target combination is won. Also, when the winning of the blue seven-matched replay is allowed, that is, when the replay GR22 is won, the winning of the blue seven-matched replay is not allowed, but the winning of the red seven-matched replay is allowed, that is, the replay GR21 is It is set so that the average number of games to be won in the additional lottery is higher than in the case of winning.

  In the added state, the stop order for winning the red 7-matched replay and the blue 7-matched replay at the time of winning the replay GR21 and the replay GR22 until the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery described later is notified by the navigation notification. Therefore, by performing the stop operation in accordance with the notified stop order, it is possible to indicate that the replay of seven red matches and the seven replays of blue are awarded, and that the number of remaining games of the ART has been added. In the case where the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery described later, the promotion replay always wins regardless of the stop order of the reels, and the additional state is ended by shifting to RT0 due to the promotion replay winning. Then, control of the ART and counting of the number of games of the ART are restarted.

  In addition, in the added state, until the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery described later, the stop order for winning the middle bell at the time of winning the push order bell is notified, so the stop is performed according to the notified stop order. By performing the operation, it is possible to reliably obtain eight medals, and it is possible to avoid the stop at the transition and to avoid the transition to RT1.

  In addition, the added state is configured to be continued until the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery described later during the control of the added state, and the middle bell is stopped when the pushing order bell is won. Even if the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the order, even if the process shifts to RT1, the internal lottery is performed at RT1 until the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery described later. When the replays GR1 to GR6 are won, the stop order for winning the promotion replay is notified, and when the replay GR11 to 16 is won by internal lottery at RT0, the stop order for winning the special replay is notified. By performing a stop operation according to the stop order thus performed, it is possible to return from RT1 to RT2 via RT0. During the control of the additional state, during the period from RT1 to return to RT2 via RT0, if the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery described later, the control of the additional state is performed. When the control is terminated and the ART control is resumed, when the replays GR1 to GR6 are won by the internal lottery in RT1, the stop order for winning the promotion replay is notified, and it is possible to shift from RT1 to RT0. is there.

  If the special combination is won before the remaining game number becomes 0 after the start of the ART, the ART is interrupted by the end of the RT2, and the counting of the ART games is also interrupted accordingly. When the special role is won during the ART, the navigation is not notified even if the pushing order bell is won until the special role is won.

  If the special role is won during the ART and the ART is interrupted, then the corresponding bonus is controlled after the winning of the special role that has been won, and after the completion of the bonus, the transition is stopped at RT3 and the transition is stopped to RT1. At this point, the control of the AT is restarted, and the AT is restarted by moving to the RT0 again after the preparation state, and the counting of the number of remaining games of the ART is restarted.

  Further, the main control section 41 notifies the stop order in which the middle bell wins by the navigation notification when the push order bell is won during the ART or the additional state, and ignores the notified stop order. When the stop operation is performed, the upper bell may win and RT0 or RT2 may be maintained. If a transition is made from RT0 or RT2 to RT1 during the ART or during the add-on state, the add-on state ends but the ART continues, and the remaining game number of the ART is decremented by 1 each time one game is consumed, and the preparation state is completed. Similarly to the above, the stop order for winning the promotion replay at the time of winning the replay GR1 to 6 in RT1 is notified by the navigation notification, and the stop operation is performed in accordance with the notified stop order, so that the promotion replay is won and the RT1 is changed to RT0. It is possible to migrate.

  In the present embodiment, when the middle replay that maintains RT0 at RT0 and the special replay that shifts to RT2, which is more advantageous for the player than RT0, are simultaneously won, the stop order in which the middle replay wins and the stop in which the special replay wins And the stop order in which the middle replay wins is notified by navigating notification, and the stop operation in the notified stop order is urged. Is to be maintained.

  In such a configuration, even if the stop order for maintaining RT0 is informed by the navigation notification, the stop order for shifting to RT2 from the notified stop order may be identified, and the stop for maintaining RT0 may be identified. Despite the notification of the order, there is a possibility that the operation may be intentionally performed in the stop order for shifting to RT2.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, RT0 is maintained when the replay GRs 11 and 12 are won at RT0, when the replay GRs 13 and 14 are won at RT0, and when the replay GRs 15 and 16 are won at RT0. The stop order for winning the middle replay and the stop order for winning the special replay shifting to RT2 are different, and further, when the replay GR11 or GR12 is won at RT0, the stop for winning the middle replay where RT0 is maintained. Although the order is the same, the stop order for winning the special replay that shifts to RT2 is different between the case where the replay GR11 is won and the case where the replay GR12 is won. Also when the replay GR15, 16 wins Going on. For this reason, even if the stop order for winning the middle replay where RT0 is maintained is specified by the navigation notification, the stop order for winning the special replay that shifts to RT2 from the stop order cannot be specified. Thus, when the stop order for maintaining RT0 is notified, it is possible to prevent the stop order for shifting to RT2 from being specified.

  In this embodiment, when the replay GR11 and the replay GR12 are won at RT0, the stop order for winning the middle replay where the RT0 is maintained is the same. However, when the replay GR11 is won and when the replay GR12 is won. If the winning order is different from the stop order for winning the special replay that shifts to RT2 in RT2, and if the stop order for winning the special replay does not match, the falling replay wins and is more disadvantageous for the player than RT0. This is the case when the replay GRs 13 and 14 are won at RT0 and when the replay GRs 15 and 16 are won at RT0. For this reason, by specifying the stop order for winning the middle replay in which RT0 is maintained by the navigation notification, even if the stop order for winning the special replay is narrowed, the stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the notified stop order. As a result, there is a possibility that the player will be disadvantaged, so that the player can be prompted to perform a stop operation in the notified stop order.

  In this embodiment, the reel stop order is applied as an operation mode for winning the middle replay in which RT0 is maintained when the replay GR11 to GR16 is won, and an operation mode for winning the special replay shifting to RT2. Alternatively, the timing of the stop operation may be applied, or a combination of the stop order and the timing of the stop operation may be applied.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the operation mode for winning the middle replay in which RT0 is maintained when the replay GR11 to GR16 is won and the special replay for shifting to RT2. In addition, the fall replay wins and shifts to RT1, which is more disadvantageous for the player than RT0. However, when replays GR11 to GR16 are elected, the middle replay in which RT0 is maintained wins, and the operation mode shifts to RT2. When the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the operation mode in which the replay is won, at least the display result other than the display result in which the special replay that shifts to RT2 wins may be stopped. The display result may be stopped.

  In the present embodiment, the operation mode for winning the special replay when the same operation mode for winning the middle replay is won is the same as the operation mode for winning the middle replay when the replay GR11 or 12 is won. A special replay is awarded in replay GRs 13 to 16 which are the same as a part of the operation mode in which special replays are won in different replays GR 13 to 16, but are different in the operation mode in which the middle replay is won when the replay GRs 11 and 12 are won. The configuration may be different from the operation mode. Also, when the replay GRs 13 and 14 have the same operation mode for winning the middle replay, the operation mode for winning the special replay is different from the operation mode for winning the middle replay when the replay GRs 13 and 14 are won. , 15 and 16 are the same as a part of the operation mode in which the special replay is won, but the operation mode in which the middle replay is won is different from that when the replay GRs 13 and 14 are won. May be configured differently from the operation mode of winning the winning. In addition, when the replay GRs 15 and 16 have the same operation mode for winning the middle replay, the operation mode for winning the special replay is different from the operation mode for winning the middle replay when the replay GRs 15 and 16 are won. Is different from the operation mode in which the special replay is won in the replay GR15, and the operation mode in which the middle replay is won is different from the operation mode in which the special replay is won in the replay GR15, 16. It may be.

  In addition, RT2 is more advantageous to the player than RT0 in that the number of ART games is more likely to be added, that is, RT2 is more advantageous to the player in that it is more likely that a benefit that is advantageous to the player is given. For example, a configuration that is advantageous to the player in terms of a high winning probability of a specific role, a high winning probability of a specific role, and a high payout rate of medals may be used.

  Here, the privilege that is advantageous to the player is a right that can be shifted to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player (to win a lottery that determines whether or not to generate an advantageous state, and to shift to an advantageous state). Winning, etc.), the right to be notified of an operation mode advantageous to the player, the right to be controlled to a gaming state having a high expected value to which a gaming value is given, and the current gaming state to be advantageous to the player. Such as the right to be notified of whether or not the game state is a good game state, the period of controlling the game state to the advantageous state (the number of fixed games, the average value of the number of games that fluctuates depending on the ending condition, etc.) It may not be directly advantageous to the player, but may be an advantage indirectly advantageous to the player, for example, a condition for obtaining a privilege on the Internet.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in RT0, a display result in which the replaying game is won is applied as a display result for maintaining RT0, a display result for shifting to RT2, and a display result for shifting to RT1. The display result may be a display result in which the small role wins or a display result in which no role wins.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control the control state relating to ART to a normal state, a CZ1 (chance zone 1) state, a CZ2 (chance zone 2) state, ART, and an additional state. is there.

  The normal state of the control state relating to the ART is a control state that is controlled first when the gaming state is controlled to RT1, and when the normal state is set, the lottery condition (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, When a watermelon or a common bell is won), an ART lottery to determine whether or not to control the ART (a state controlled by the AT at RT0) and an additional state (the additional probability of the number of ART games is high) An additional state lottery that determines whether or not to control the state (probability state) and a CZ lottery that determines whether to control the state to CZ1 or CZ2 are performed. In the normal state, the probability of winning the ART in the ART lottery, the probability of winning the additional state in the additional state lottery, and the probability of winning the CZ1 or CZ2 in the CZ lottery are respectively set to the normal probability. In addition, regardless of the number of games after the transition to the normal state, one of the ART lottery, the additional state lottery, and the CZ lottery is won, and a predetermined transition condition is satisfied (the ART lottery, the additional state lottery, the CZ lottery). , The precursory period set based on the winning of the game has passed), and the control state is shifted to the corresponding control state.

  The CZ1 state is started when the CZ1 state is won by the CZ lottery in the normal state and a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. In the CZ1 state, when the lottery condition (in this embodiment, the strong cherry, the weak cherry, the watermelon, the win of the common bell) is established, the ART lottery and the additional state lottery are performed. In the CZ1 state, the probability of winning the ART in the ART lottery and the probability of winning the additional state in the additional state lottery are respectively set higher than in the normal state, and the ART and the additional state are won in comparison with the normal state. It is easier to do. Further, when the number of games since the start of the CZ1 state reaches a predetermined number of games (10 games in this embodiment), the state is shifted to the normal state.

  The CZ2 state is started when the CZ2 state is won by the CZ lottery in the normal state and a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. When the lottery condition (in this embodiment, the strong cherry, the weak cherry, the watermelon, and the common bell is won) is established in the CZ2 state, the ART lottery and the additional state lottery are performed in the same manner as in the CZ1 state. Is In the CZ2 state, the probability of winning the ART in the ART lottery and the probability of winning the additional state in the additional state lottery are set higher than the normal state and the CZ1 state, respectively. It is easier to win the ART and additional states. Further, when the number of games since the start of the CZ2 state reaches a predetermined number of games (five games in this embodiment), the state is shifted to the normal state.

  The ART is started when an ART lottery is won in a normal state, a CZ1 state, and a CZ2 state, and a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. Alternatively, in the normal state, the CZ1 state, and the CZ2 state, in the case where the additional state lottery is won and the state is controlled to the additional state, the processing is started after the end. In the case of the ART, when the lottery condition (in this embodiment, the strong cherry, the weak cherry, the watermelon, the win of the common bell) is established, the number of games to be added and whether or not to add the remaining number of games of the ART are determined. Is determined, and an additional state lottery is determined. In ART, the probability of determining that one or more games are added in the additional lottery is set to the normal probability, and the probability of winning the additional state in the additional state lottery is set to a higher probability than the normal state. , It is easier to win in the added state than in the normal state. Further, after the ART is started, the remaining game number of the ART is decremented by 1 every time a game is played, and the state is shifted to the normal state when the remaining game number of the ART becomes 0.

  In the present embodiment, in the ART (RT0), an extra lottery is performed based on the result of the second lottery in which the internal lottery is performed with the gaming state being RT2. However, the same value is set, and the result of the internal lottery relating to the small role and the result of the second lottery are the same. Therefore, the additional lottery is performed in the ART based on the result of the second lottery. It does not affect the degree of advantage for the player.

  The additional state is started when the additional state lottery is won in the normal state, the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state, and the ART and a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. In the additional state, the additional lottery is performed when the lottery condition (in this embodiment, all the small wins, the replay GR21, or the replay GR22 in the internal lottery or the second lottery) is established. In the additional state, the probability of determining to add the number of ART games in the additional lottery is set higher than that of the ART, and it is determined that the number of ART games is added to the ART. It is easier.

  The main control unit 41 performs a lottery (ART lottery, additional state lottery, CZ lottery) for determining whether to shift the control state related to ART, and determines that the control state related to ART is to be shifted. Then, a state transition flag (ART transition flag, additional state transition flag, CZ1 state transition flag, CZ2 state transition flag) capable of specifying the control state of the transition destination determined by lottery is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. When the state transition flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the type of the state transition flag indicating the winning control state and the number of holdings for each type are set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c so that the main control unit 41 Can have a plurality of state transition flags irrespective of whether they are related to the same type of control state or different types of control state.

  When the control state relating to the ART is the normal state and is not in the precursor period, the ART transition flag, the additional state transition flag, the CZ1 state transition flag, the CZ2 state transition flag, and the additional state transition flag are set at the start of the game. When at least one of the state transition flags is set, when the precursor period is not during the ART, and when the additional state transition flag is set at the start of the game, the set one state transition flag is set. Set as a state transition flag of the control state to be transitioned next time. At the start of the game in which the game has shifted to the normal state after the end of the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state, and the ART, at least one of an ART shift flag, an additional state shift flag, a CZ1 state shift flag, and a CZ2 state shift flag is set. Is set, the control state having the highest advantage for the player among the set state transition flags (in the present embodiment, the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state, the added state, and the ART, the degree of advantage is higher in this order) ) Is set as the state transition flag of the control state to be shifted next time. Then, a precursory period lottery for determining the number of games to be controlled in the precursory period based on the type of the state transition flag set as the state transition flag of the control state to be transitioned next time is performed.

  The precursor period of the present embodiment includes a basic period (six games, sixteen games, and twenty-two games) and an additional period (sometimes referred to as α. Α = 0 games to three games). In the period lottery, the basic period is selected in accordance with a predetermined ratio based on the state transition flag that triggered the precursor period lottery, and within the range of 0 to 3 regardless of the control state of the transition destination. The number of games in the additional period is randomly selected.

  As shown in FIG. 28, when the CZ1 state is won, the ratio of selecting the precursor period is 4% in the base period 6 games, 86% in 16 games, 10% in 22 games, When the CZ2 state is won, the ratio of selecting the precursor period is 80% for the base period of 6 games, 14% for 16 games, and 6% for 22 games, and the ART is won in the normal state. The rate of selecting the precursor period is 2% for 6 games in the basic period, 28% for 16 games, 70% for 22 games, and when the additional state is elected in the normal state. The ratio of selecting the precursor period is 2% for the base period of 6 games, 4% for 16 games, and 96% for 22 games, and selects the precursor period when the additional state is won during the ART. Rate to do A 80% basic period 6 games, 16 games are 18%, 22 game is 2%.

  In the present embodiment, when the control state regarding the ART is the normal state, the precursor period when the CZ1 state is won, the precursor period when the CZ2 state is won, and the precursor period when the ART is won. The precursor period, the precursor period when the additional state is won can be selected by the precursor period lottery. In the precursor period lottery, any one of the control states of the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state, the ART, and the additional state is won. Even if it is, the basic period can be selected from any of the sixteenth, sixteen, and twenty-two game periods, and therefore, even if any of the basic periods has elapsed during the precursory period, the ART, additional state, It is possible to indicate the possibility that any of the control states of the CZ1 state and the CZ2 state has been won.

  In addition, when the CZ1 state is won in the normal state, the rate of selection of 16G + α is higher than when other states are won, and when the CZ2 state is won in the normal state, 6G + α is selected at a higher rate than when the state has been won. When the normal state has been selected for the additional state lottery or the ART lottery has been selected, another state has been selected. The rate at which 22G + α is selected is higher than sometimes, and it is possible to suggest a control state in which there is a high possibility that the game will shift in the normal state after that due to the difference in the number of games.

  The main control unit 41 includes one precursor period counter indicating the number of remaining games in the precursor period in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and determines the sum of the basic period and the additional period selected in the precursor period lottery by the precursor period. Is set in the precursor period counter as the number of games. The main control unit 41 determines whether the precursor lottery is performed based on any of the ART transition flag, the additional state transition flag, the CZ1 state transition flag, and the CZ2 state transition flag. By setting the number of games in the one precursor period counter, the precursor period when transitioning to the CZ1 state or the CZ2 state, the precursor period when transitioning to the ART, and the precursor period when transitioning to the add-on state are also determined by the RAM 41c. Are counted by a common precursor period counter provided in a predetermined area of the data.

  Thereafter, the main control unit 41 decrements the value of the precursor period counter by 1 when the game is started, and determines whether or not the value of the precursor period timer is 0 when the game is ended. . If the value of the precursor period counter is 0 and it is determined that the precursor period determined by the precursor period lottery has ended, the control state specified by the state transition flag set as the control state to be transferred next time is set. The control state relating to the ART is set, and the state transition flag is released from the RAM 41c. Thus, at the end of the game in which the precursor period has ended, the control state relating to the ART is shifted to the new control state, and control based on the control state relating to the new ART is performed from the start of the next game. .

  Next, when the gaming state is RT1 and the control state relating to the ART is the normal state, the flow from winning the ART lottery to controlling to the ART will be described.

  The main control unit 41 determines whether or not the state transition flag is set at the start of the game when the game state is RT1 and the control state relating to the ART is the normal state and is not in the precursor period, If the ART transition flag is set, a sign period lottery is performed, and after the sign period, when the sign period selected in the sign period lottery ends, the ART is controlled.

  When controlling to ART, control is first performed to AT. The state from the start of the AT control to the transition to RT0 is also referred to as a preparation state. In the preparation state, the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification when the target combination is won. At this time, in the RT1, when the replays GR1 to GR6 are won, the navigation notification is performed, and when the replays GR1 to GR6 are won, the stop order for winning the promotion replay is notified by the navigation notification. By performing the operation, it becomes possible to win the promotion replay and shift from RT1 to RT0. In addition, after shifting to the preparation state, the stop order for winning the middle bell at the time of winning the push order bell is notified, so that by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order, eight medals are reliably obtained. It becomes possible.

  The main control unit 41 ends the preparation state when the promotion replay wins at RT1, shifts to RT0, and starts the ART control. Accordingly, the main control unit 41 sets the predetermined number of games as the number of remaining ART games allocated to the RAM 91c, and starts counting the number of remaining ART games. After the ART is started, the stop order for winning the middle bell at the time of winning the push order bell is notified, so that by performing the stop operation according to the notified stop order, it is possible to reliably obtain eight medals. At the same time, it is possible to avoid the stop of the transition and the winning of the fall replay, and the transition to RT1. In addition, in a case where the additional state lottery described below has not been won, the stop order for winning the middle replay at the time of winning the replay GR11 to 16 is notified by the navigation notification, so that the stop operation is performed in accordance with the notified stop order. As a result, it becomes possible to win the middle replay and maintain RT0.

  After the start of the ART, the remaining game number is decremented by one each time one game is consumed, and when the remaining game number becomes zero, the control of the AT is ended. As a result, the navigation notification is not executed, so that it is impossible to avoid the stop of the transition at the time of winning the push order bell, and to avoid the winning of the fall replay at the time of winning the replay GR11 to GR16. Is stopped or a fall replay wins, and a transition to RT1 completes a series of control of AT and ART.

  Further, if the lottery condition (winning of strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell) is satisfied before the remaining game number of the ART becomes 0 after the start of the ART, whether or not to increase the number of games of the ART, An additional lottery is performed to determine the number of games to be added. Then, when the additional lottery is won, the number of won games is added to the remaining number of games in the ART.

  In addition, if the lottery condition (win of strong cherry) is satisfied before the number of remaining games becomes 0 after the start of the ART, the state is shifted to the additional state where the probability that the number of the ART games is added is higher than during the ART. An additional state lottery for deciding whether or not to do so is performed. Then, when the additional state lottery is won, the additional state transition flag is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, so that the control to shift to the additional state is performed based on the setting of the additional state transition flag. It will be.

  Next, a description will be given of a flow from when the gaming state is RT0 and when the control state relating to the ART is ART to the win in the additional state lottery to the control in the additional state.

  The main control unit 41 wins the additional state during the ART, and when the additional state transition flag is set, determines whether or not the state transition flag is set at the start of the game that is not in the early period, If the additional state transition flag is set, a preliminary period lottery is performed, and after the preliminary period, when the preliminary period selected by the preliminary period lottery ends, the additional state is controlled.

  When the state is controlled to be added during the ART, the stop order for winning the special replay at the time of winning the replay GR11 to 16 is notified by the navigation notification after the elapse of the precursor period, and the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop order. As a result, the special replay is won, and the game is shifted to RT2. If the process moves to RT2 due to the winning in the additional state lottery, the ART is interrupted, the counting of the number of games in the ART is also interrupted, and the system moves to the additional state. The additional state continues until the promotion replay is won, during which time any of the lottery targets wins in the internal lottery or the second lottery described later, an additional lottery is performed, and the number of games won in the additional lottery is calculated. It is added to the number of remaining games in ART. In particular, when the replay GR21 and the replay GR22 are won, the average number of games to be won in the additional lottery is set to be higher than when the other lottery targets are won, and when the replay GR22 is won. The average number of games to be won in the additional lottery is set to be higher than when the replay GR21 is won.

  In the additional state, the stop order for winning the red 7-matched replay and the blue 7-matched replay at the time of winning the replays GR21 to 23 is notified by the navigation notification until the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery described later. By performing a stop operation in accordance with the notified stop order, seven red replays, seven blue replays, or missed replays a and b can be won. In addition, when the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery, it is impossible to avoid the winning of the promotion replay, and the additional state ends by shifting to RT0 by the promotion replay winning. The ART and the counting of the number of games of the ART are restarted.

  Also, in the added state, regardless of the gaming state, until the promotion replay is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery, the stop order in which the middle bell is won when the push order bell is won is notified, so that the stop order is notified. By performing the stop operation in the stop order, it is possible to reliably obtain eight medals, to avoid stopping at the transition, and to avoid transition to RT1.

  Further, the added state is a case where a stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the stop order in which the middle bell is won at the time of winning in the pushing order bell at RT2, so that the transition is stopped and the process shifts to RT1. Even if there is an internal lottery or a second lottery to be described later, the promotion replay is continued until the election is won. When the replays GR1 to GR6 are won by the internal lottery at RT1, the replay is performed by the internal lottery at RT0. When the GRs 11 to 16 are won, a stop operation is performed in accordance with the notified stop order, thereby returning from RT1 to RT2 via RT0.

  If the special combination is won before the number of remaining games becomes 0 after the start of the ART, the ART is interrupted by the end of the RT0, and the counting of the number of games in the ART is also interrupted. When the special role is won during the ART, the navigation is not notified even if the pushing order bell is won until the special role is won.

  If the special role is won during the ART and the ART is interrupted, then the corresponding bonus is controlled after the winning of the special role that has been won, and after the completion of the bonus, the transition is stopped at RT3 and the transition is stopped to RT1. At this point, the control of the AT is restarted, and the AT is restarted by moving to the RT0 again after the preparation state, and the counting of the number of remaining games of the ART is restarted.

  Further, the main control section 41 notifies the stop order in which the middle bell wins by the navigation notification when the push order bell is won during the ART or the additional state, and ignores the notified stop order. When the stop operation is performed, the upper bell may win and RT0 or RT2 may be maintained. If a transition is made from RT0 or RT2 to RT1 during the ART or during the add-on state, the add-on state ends but the ART continues, and the remaining game number of the ART is decremented by 1 each time one game is consumed, and the preparation state is completed. Similarly to the above, the stop order for winning the promotion replay at the time of winning the replay GR1 to 6 in RT1 is notified by the navigation notification, and the stop operation is performed in accordance with the notified stop order, so that the promotion replay is won and the RT1 is changed to RT0. It is possible to migrate.

  Note that the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification by continuing the ART control during the precursor period during the ART, and decrements the remaining game number of the ART by one each time one game is consumed. If the number of remaining games in the ART becomes 0 before the omen period ends, the navigation notification is continued until the omen period ends.

  Next, a description will be given of a flow from when the gaming state is RT1 and the control state relating to the ART is the normal state to when the additional state lottery is won and the state is controlled to the additional state.

  When the game state is RT1 and the control state relating to the ART is the normal state and the precursor period is not in progress, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the state transition flag is set at the start of the game, and adds the game. If the state transition flag is set, a sign period lottery is performed, and after the sign period, when the sign period selected in the sign period lottery ends, the state is controlled to be added.

  In the case where the control is performed from RT1 to the additional state, the control is first performed by the AT, as in the case of the above-described control by the ART. After the control of the AT is started, the navigation notification is executed when the target role is won. When the promotion replay wins at RT1, the process moves to RT0. After that, the stop order for winning the special replay at the time of winning of the replays GR11 to GR16 is notified by the navigation notification, and the stop operation is performed in accordance with the notified stop order to win the special replay and shift to RT2. Then, by shifting to RT2, the state shifts to the additional state.

  After the transition to the additional state, the internal state or the second lottery causes the promotion state to end at RT0 due to the promotion replay winning when the promotion replay is won, thereby terminating the state and proceeding to ART.

  Next, the flow from winning the CZ lottery to controlling to the CZ1 state or the CZ2 state when the gaming state is RT1 and the control state regarding ART is the normal state will be described.

  The main control unit 41 determines whether or not the state transition flag is set at the start of the game when the game state is RT1 and the control state relating to the ART is the normal state and is not in the precursor period, If the CZ1 state transition flag is set, a sign period lottery is performed, and after the sign period, when the sign period selected in the sign period lottery ends, the state is controlled to the CZ1 state. If the CZ2 state transition flag is set, a sign period lottery is performed, and after the sign period, when the sign period won in the sign period lottery ends, the state is controlled to the CZ2 state. Then, when the predetermined number of games ends in the CZ1 state or the CZ2 state, the state shifts to the normal state.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets a special role winning flag indicating that the special role has been won by winning the special role in the internal lottery in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. If the special role election flag is not set, each time the game is started, it is determined whether or not the warning period is in the warning period based on the value of the warning period counter. While the value of the period counter is decremented by one and updated, if it is not during the precursory period, it is determined whether or not any state transition flag is set. A period lottery is performed, and control is performed during the precursor period. In addition, when the special role winning flag is set, each time the game is started, it is determined whether any one of the state transition flags is set and the precursor period is set. Is not updated by subtracting 1 from the value, and each time the game is ended, regardless of whether or not the precursory period is in progress, the precursory period counter is reset to 0. Based on the special role winning flag being set, the precursor period counter is reset, so that if the special role is won by the internal lottery during the precursor period and the special role winning flag is set, The precursor period counter is reset based on the setting of the special role winning flag, and the ongoing precursor period is stopped. Further, at the end of the game, the precursor period counter is reset based on the fact that the special role winning flag is set, so that the game is played in a state where the special role winning flag is set, that is, in a so-called carryover state. The process of resetting the precursor period counter is repeated each time.

  Then, when the special role is won, the RB and BB that have been won are controlled. Thereafter, when the control of RB and BB is completed, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is RT1, and if it is not RT1 (if there is RT3), the process waits until shifting to RT1. Thereafter, when the state shifts to RT1, the state shift flag is referred to, and if any of the state shift flags is set, the state shift flag having a higher priority is set as the state shift flag of the control state to shift to next time. Then, the precursor period lottery is performed based on the set state transition flag, the precursor period is set, the counting of the precursor period is started, and the value of the precursor period counter is decremented by one every time the game is started. When the precursor period elapses, the state is shifted to the control state based on the state transition flag.

  As described above, when the RB and BB are won during the precursor period, the main controller 41 resets the precursor period counter to 0 based on the setting of the special role winning flag. As a result, the executed precursory period is stopped. In this case, when the special role based on the winning RB and BB wins, and after the RB and BB accompanying the prize are completed and the process shifts to RT1 through RT3, the precursor period lottery is performed again to set the precursor period. , For the set period.

  Further, the main control unit 41 resets the precursor period counter every time the game is started based on the fact that the special role winning flag is set. As a result, when RB and BB have been won, in a so-called carryover state, a process of resetting the precursor period counter is performed each time the game is started.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets a special role winning flag indicating that RB and BB have been won in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c by winning of RB and BB by internal lottery. Until RB and BB win, the special role winning flag is kept, so-called carryover state is maintained, and the special role winning flag is cleared by the RB and BB winning, and the winning RB, The control of BB is started. Further, the main control unit 41 includes a ceiling game number counter for counting the number of games until the RB and BB are won again after the control of RB and BB is completed in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. , When the control of BB is finished, when the game is ended with the RB and the special role winning flag being carried over, the ceiling game number counter is reset and set to 0, while the game is started. In addition, by adding 1 to the value of the ceiling game number counter, the number of games from the time when the control of RB and BB is completed to the time when RB and BB are won again (hereinafter referred to as the number of games between special role election). Is counted).

  Then, at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 refers to the ceiling game number counter to determine whether or not the number of special role winning games has reached a predetermined prescribed number of games, If the number of games has reached the prescribed number of games, an ART transition flag is set as a benefit that is advantageous to the player, and the ceiling game number counter is reset to 0. As a result, the ART transition flag is referred to at the start of the next game, whereby the ART is controlled after the precursor period.

  As described above, the main control unit 41 adds 1 to the ceiling game number counter set in the RAM 41c at the start of the game, and then determines whether the value of the ceiling game number counter has reached the specified game number. However, if the specified number of games has been reached, the ceiling game number counter is reset after setting the ART transition flag as an advantage for the player. Even when the value reaches the specified number of games, the player can receive an advantageous privilege.

  In the present embodiment, the counting of the ceiling game number counter is started after the end of RB and BB, and the ceiling game number counter is cleared when the RB and BB are won. That is, both the RB and BB after the end of RB and BB. In this configuration, the bonus is provided when the number of unwinned games reaches the specified number of games. However, counting of the ceiling game number counter is started after any one of RB, BB, and ART ends, and the ceiling game number counter is set. The structure that is cleared when the RB, BB winning, the ART transition flag, and the additional state transition flag are won, that is, the number of games in which neither the RB, the BB, the ART, or the additional state is won after the completion of the RB, BB, or the ART, is the specified number of games. A configuration may be such that a privilege is given by arriving.

  Next, the precursor effect and the false precursor effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 in relation to the control performed by the main control unit 41 during the precursor period.

  When a predetermined lottery condition (in this embodiment, a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a watermelon, and a common bell is won) is established at the time of starting the game, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets a control state related to ART. When the lottery (ART lottery, additional state lottery, CZ lottery) for determining whether or not to shift is performed, and it is determined to shift the control state relating to ART, the precursor period determined by the precursor period lottery is determined. Set the precursor period counter. Then, the sub control unit 91 outputs the result of the lottery (ART lottery, additional state lottery, CZ lottery) and an ART state command that can specify the number of remaining games in the precursor period specified based on the value of the precursor period counter. Send to On the other hand, when it is specified that the main control unit 41 controls the precursor period based on the ART status command, the sub-control unit 91 can execute the precursor effect, the continuous effect, and the result notification effect. It is.

  The indication effect is executed over an indication period determined by the main control unit 41 when predetermined lottery conditions (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell winning) are established. . By executing the indication effect, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the state will be controlled to any of the ART, the additional state, the CZ1 state, and the CZ2 state. Further, in the precursor effect, the effect mode of the background image and the like displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 is different from the normal effect (the effect executed in most of the normal state that is not controlled by the AT). The difference allows the player to recognize that the sign is being produced.

  The continuous effect is an effect that indicates that there is a high possibility that the player has won the ART, the added state, the CZ1 state, or the CZ2 state over a plurality of games (three games in this embodiment), and finally the ART is performed. This is an effect for informing whether or not one of the added state, the CZ1 state, and the CZ2 state has been won. The game is started in the next game in which the number of remaining games in the precursor period has reached the predetermined number of games (three games in the present embodiment). The result of notifying whether or not one of the state, the CZ1 state, and the CZ2 state has been won is notified. By executing the continuous effect, it is suggested that there is a high possibility of being controlled to any of the ART, the additional state, the CZ1 state, and the CZ2 state.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 29, when predetermined lottery conditions (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell win) are established, when the CZ1 state is won, the main control unit 41 , An ART state command that can specify the winning of the CZ1 state and the number of remaining games in the precursor period to the sub control unit 91. Further, in each game during the subsequent sign period, an ART state command capable of specifying the number of remaining games in the sign period is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. Then, control of the CZ1 state is started from the next game in which the number of remaining games in the precursor period has become 0, and an ART state command capable of specifying that the game is in the CZ1 state is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

  On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 starts the indication effect in the game during the indication period after the main control unit 41 specifies that the control of the indication period has been started based on the ART status command. . Then, in the next game in which the number of remaining games in the precursor period has reached the predetermined number of games (three games in this embodiment), the continuous effect is started, and at the end of the final game of the continuous effect, the ART state command is issued. The result notification for notifying the lottery result of the CZ1 lottery specified based on the result is performed. Then, after the main control unit 41 shifts to the CZ1 state, the main control unit 41 performs an effect during the CZ1 according to the CZ1 state. The precursor effect may be any one that is executed in a game in which the main control unit 41 is controlled in the precursor period, and the precursor effect is started from the game in which the main control unit 41 starts the control in the precursor period. Alternatively, the processing may be started from the next game onward after the main control unit 41 starts the control of the precursor period.

  Referring to FIG. 29, when predetermined lottery conditions (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, and common bell are won) are established, the precursor performed by the sub control unit 91 when the CZ1 state is won. The effect has been described. However, when the predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, the CZ2 state other than the CZ1 state, the ART, the additional state is won, and the main control unit 41 controls the precursor period. The sub-control unit 91 performs a sign effect in a game during the sign period based on the ART state command.

  The sub-control unit 91 according to the present embodiment performs an effect in the same manner as the precursor effect for a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, six games) during a period other than the period in which the main control unit 41 performs the control of the precursor period. ~ 18 games) can be executed.

  The false sign effect is different from the normal effect (the effect executed in most of the normal states not controlled by the AT) in the effect mode of the background image and the like displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, similarly to the sign effect. The player is unable to recognize whether the indication effect is being performed or the false indication effect, and the execution of the false indication effect is performed in the same manner as in the case where the indication effect is executed. , The additional state, the CZ1 state, or the CZ2 state. In the false omen effect, the continuous effect is executed over the last predetermined number of games (three games in the present embodiment). At the end of the last game of the false omen effect and the continuous effect, the ART, the additional state, and the CZ1 state are set. , CZ2 state, the result is notified.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 30A, the main control unit 41 determines that the predetermined lottery condition (in this embodiment, the strong cherry, the weak cherry, the watermelon, and the common bell) is satisfied, the main control unit 41 When the lottery (ART lottery, additional state lottery, CZ lottery) for determining whether or not to shift the control state relating to ART performed on the 41 side is determined not to shift to any control state, An ART state command that can specify that none of the control states has been won and that the precursor period has not been set is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, and the control state when a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied is determined. continue.

  On the other hand, when it is specified that it is determined not to shift to any control state based on the ART state command, a false precursor effect lottery for determining whether to execute the false precursor effect is performed. . In the false sign effect lottery, it is determined that the false sign effect is to be executed at a predetermined ratio (in this embodiment, 1/3). If it is determined that the false omen effect is to be performed in the false omen effect lottery, the false omen effect is started in the subsequent game. It should be noted that the false omen effect may be started as long as predetermined lottery conditions (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell are won) are established. May be started from the game in which the game has been performed, or may be started from the next game after the game in which the false precursor effect lottery is performed.

  After the false omen effect is started, a continuous effect over the remaining three games is performed. At the end of the last game of the false omen effect and the continuous effect, the control state related to the ART performed by the main control unit 41 is shifted. After the result of notifying the lottery result (out) of the lottery (ART lottery, additional state lottery, CZ lottery) for determining whether or not to perform the determination, the state returns to the effect state before the false sign effect is started.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 30B, during the execution period of the false precursor effect on the sub-control unit 91 side, before the continuous effect is performed, the main control unit 41 side sets the ART, the added state, When one of the CZ1 state and the CZ2 state is won, the sub-control unit 91 stops the false precursor effect, and selects one of the ART, the additional state, the CZ1 state, and the CZ2 state specified based on the ART state command. Starts a forerunner effect based on winning. After the indication effect is started, after performing the indication effect, the continuous effect, and the result notification based on the number of remaining games of the indication period specified by the ART state command, the control state is shifted to the main control unit 41 side. Performs the appropriate production.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (c), during the execution period of the false precursor effect on the sub-control unit 91 side, and during the execution of the continuous effect, the main control unit 41 side sets the ART, the additional state, and the CZ1. When either the state or the CZ2 state is won, the sub-control unit 91 continues the false omen effect and the continuous effect, and executes the result notification (out) at the end of the last game of the false omen effect and the continuous effect. Then, the false omen effect is ended. Thereafter, the indication effect is started when it is determined that the indication period is in progress based on the ART state command, and the indication effect, the continuous effect, and the result notification are based on the number of remaining games in the indication period specified by the ART state command. Is performed, and an effect corresponding to the control state shifted on the main control unit 41 side is executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can control to a control state relating to a plurality of ARTs including an ART which is an advantageous gaming state for the player, an additional state, a CZ1 state, and a CZ2 state. Yes, before shifting to these control states, the number of games in the precursor period is set in the precursor period counter, and the precursor state is controlled according to the number of remaining games in the precursor period specified based on the precursor period counter. .

  In such a configuration, a precursor period counter is provided for each of a plurality of control state types, and the precursor state is controlled in accordance with the number of remaining games in the precursor period set in the precursor period counter. Not only the control for controlling the period becomes complicated, but also a storage area for allocating a plurality of precursor period counters to the RAM 41c is required.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined lottery condition (in this embodiment, the strong cherry, the weak cherry, the watermelon, the win of the common bell) is satisfied, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment shifts the control state regarding the ART. When a lottery (ART lottery, additional state lottery, CZ lottery) for deciding whether or not to perform the control is performed, and when it is determined that the control state related to the ART is to be shifted, the control state of the transfer destination determined by the lottery is changed. Specifiable state transition flags (ART transition flag, additional state transition flag, CZ1 state transition flag, CZ2 state transition flag) are set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the precursor period is set based on the state transition flag being set. After the setting, the transition to the control state according to the state transition flag can be performed when the precursor period has elapsed. In the case of setting a precursor period, the precursor period is set in common to one precursor period counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Therefore, the control for specifying the precursor period according to the set state transition flag is performed. The simplification can be achieved, and the capacity of the storage area for storing the precursor information can be reduced.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can set a CZ1 state transition flag and a CZ2 state transition flag as predetermined state transition flags in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. A precursor period is set based on the state transition flag being set, and it is possible to transition to the CZ1 state when the precursor period elapses, and when the control state related to the ART is the normal state. , The precursory period is set based on the setting of the CZ2 state transition flag, and the transition to the CZ2 state can be made when the precursory period has elapsed, and the CZ1 state transition flag is set. Both the precursor period set based on the above and the precursor period set based on the setting of the CZ2 state transition flag are set in the RAM 41c. Since the setting is made in common to one precursor period counter provided in the predetermined area, the control for specifying the precursor period according to the set state transition flag can be simplified, and the storage area for storing the precursor information can be simplified. The capacity can be reduced.

  Further, when the control state related to the ART is the normal state, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can set a CZ1 state transition flag and a CZ2 state transition flag as a state transition flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, When the control state is the normal state, a precursory period is set based on the setting of the CZ1 state transition flag or the CZ2 state transition flag, and the set CZ1 state is set when the precursory period has elapsed. It is possible to make a transition to a control state corresponding to the transition flag and the CZ2 state transition flag. When the control state relating to ART is ART, an additional state transition flag can be set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as the state transition flag. , When the control state is ART, based on the setting of the additional state transition flag, Is set, and it is possible to make a transition to the additional state by the elapse of the precursor period, and the CZ1 state transition flag or the CZ2 state transition flag is set when the control state relating to the ART is the normal state. A precursor period counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is also a precursor period set based on the above, and a precursor period set based on the fact that the additional state transition flag is set when the control state relating to the ART is ART. , It is possible to simplify the control for specifying the precursor period according to the set state transition flag, and to reduce the capacity of the storage area for storing the precursor information.

  Note that the main control unit 41 shifts to the first specific state when at least the first shift condition is satisfied, and shifts to the second specific state when the second shift condition is satisfied. A precursor period controlled before the transition to the first specific state after the first transition condition is satisfied, and a precursor period controlled before the transition to the second specific state after the second transition condition is satisfied, If the configuration is such that the precursor period is counted by setting a common counter, the control for specifying the precursor period according to the specific state to be shifted can be simplified, and the capacity of the storage area for storing the precursor information can be reduced. can do.

  Further, in such a configuration, the first specific state and the second specific state are not limited to the state in which the ART winning probability is high as in the CZ1 state and the CZ2 state in the present embodiment, but are advantageous to the player. Advantageous state (AT, ART, etc.) is a state in which the winning is possible and the winning expectation is different, AT, ART, etc. is an advantageous state that is advantageous for the player such as AT, ART, and the like, or a specific condition In a configuration in which the number of times of completion of the game (game completion, winning of a specific role, winning of a specific role, etc.) reaches a specified number of times, the state is controlled to be in an advantageous state. (A state in which the prescribed number of times is reduced, the number of times of establishment is added more than usual) and the degree is different, or any two of these states are applied. It may be. In addition, the advantageous state means that the probability that a display result advantageous to the player is derived, the probability that the display result advantageous to the player is derived, and the probability that a privilege advantageous to the player is given are higher than in the normal state. Is higher, or an operation mode for deriving a display result advantageous to the player is notified, and the like, so that the player becomes advantageous. Further, in a configuration that is advantageous to the player by achieving the task before the predetermined state ends, the predetermined state, that is, the state that is advantageous to the player by increasing the period is applied as the advantageous state. Is also good.

  Further, in a configuration in which the main control unit 41 shifts to the specific state at least when the specific shift condition is satisfied in the first state, and shifts to the special state when the special shift condition is satisfied in the second state, In the first state, a precursor period controlled before the transition to the specific state after the specific transition condition is satisfied, and a precursor period controlled before the transition to the special state after the special transition condition is satisfied in the second state, Any configuration may be used as long as it is set to a common counter and counts the precursor period. With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the control for specifying the precursor period according to the specific state to be shifted, and to use the precursor information. The capacity of a storage area for storing can be reduced.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 sets the precursor period as the predetermined number of games, but the precursor period may be a period other than the period based on the number of games, and the predetermined combination (for example, It may be the number of times the replaying game) wins, the number of games in which no role wins, or the like.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets a precursor period set based on the setting of the CZ1 state transition flag and a precursor period set based on the setting of the CZ2 state transition flag. In each case, the length of the precursor period is selected based on the CZ1 state transition flag, and the length of the precursor period is determined based on the CZ2 state transition flag. Since the length of the easy-to-select period differs between the case of selection and the case of the precursor period based on the CZ1 state transition flag, the period of an appropriate length is different between the case of the precursor period based on the CZ2 state transition flag and the case of the precursor period based on the CZ2 state transition flag. Over a precursor period.

  Further, when the control state is the normal state, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets a precursor period to be set based on whether the CZ1 state transition flag or the CZ2 state transition flag is set, and sets the control state to the ART state. In the case of, the precursor period to be set based on the setting of the additional state transition flag is determined by the precursor period lottery. In the precursor period lottery, the CZ1 state transition flag or the CZ2 state is determined. Since the length of the easy-to-select period is different between the case where the length of the precursor period is selected based on the transition flag and the case where the length of the precursor period is selected based on the additional state transition flag, the CZ1 state is selected. The period of an appropriate length between the case of the precursor period based on the transition flag or the CZ2 state transition flag and the case of the precursor period based on the additional state transition flag It is possible to control the aura period over.

  Note that the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment selects any of the 6 game + α, 16 game + α, and 22 game + α precursor periods regardless of which state transition flag is used to determine the precursor period. Possible configurations, that is, the length of the precursor period to be controlled before the transition to the CZ1 state, the length of the precursor period to be controlled before the transition to the CZ2 state, the length of the precursor period to be controlled before the transition to the ART, and an addition Although the length of the precursor period to be controlled before transition to the state is determined to be the period of the overlapping range, the main control unit 41 determines that the precursor period determined according to the type of the state transition flag is a state transition flag. It is good also as composition which does not overlap as a period of a different range for every kind of flag. With such a configuration, it is possible to indicate the possibility that any of the control states of the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state, the ART, and the additional state has been won based on the number controlled in the precursor period.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control the control state relating to the ART to the control state including the normal state, the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state, the ART, and the additional state. Can be shifted to another control state, and the sub-control unit 91 has a configuration capable of controlling the effect based on various commands transmitted from the main control unit 41. 41 transmits to the sub-control unit 91 an ART state command capable of specifying the number of remaining games in the precursor period when shifting the control state, and the sub-control unit 91 performs the precursor period in the precursor period based on the ART state command. Since the indication effect indicating that there is a certain effect is executed, the control load of the main control unit 41 can be reduced.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control the control state relating to the ART to the control state including the normal state, the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state, the ART, and the additional state. The main control unit 41 is capable of controlling effects based on various commands transmitted from the control unit 41. The main control unit 41 performs predetermined lottery conditions (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, When the common bell is won), a lottery (ART lottery, additional state lottery, CZ lottery) is performed to determine whether to shift the control state related to the ART, and an ART state in which the lottery result can be specified. Since the command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, the sub-control unit 91 can specify whether or not the lottery is won based on the ART status command. Then, based on the ART state command, if it is specified that the lottery for deciding whether to shift the control state relating to the ART has not been won, the sub-control unit 91 produces the same effect as the sign effect. In the embodiment, a false precursor effect lottery for determining whether or not to perform a false precursor effect is performed over a predetermined period, and a false precursor effect is executed when the false precursor effect lottery is won, so that the control load of the main control unit 41 is reduced. be able to.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment performs the normal effect (the majority of the normal state that is not controlled by the AT) as the effect of the background image displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as the precursor effect and the false precursor effect. However, the sub-control unit 91 performs different effects, such as changing the background displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 as a precursor effect or a false precursor effect. Not limited to the configuration described above, a configuration in which the effect frequency is different, a configuration in which the effect that can be easily executed is different, etc. Any configuration is acceptable.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment transmits an ART status command capable of specifying whether or not to perform control during the precursor period to the sub control unit 91, and the sub control unit 91 performs the processing based on the ART status command. When the main control unit 41 specifies that the control is not performed during the precursor period, it is determined whether or not to perform the false precursor effect at a predetermined rate. The sub-control unit 91 manages whether or not to execute the precursor effect, that is, whether or not to execute the false precursor effect. However, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not to execute the false precursor effect. The sub-control unit 91 may execute the false omen effect when the control unit 41 determines to execute the false omen effect.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 of the present embodiment starts the indication effect in the game during the precursor period after the main control unit 41 specifies that the control of the precursor period has been started based on the ART status command. The precursor effect may be any configuration that is executed when the main control unit 41 is controlling during the precursor period, and the sub-control unit 91 starts the control of the precursor period by the main control unit 41. It may be configured to start an indication effect in the played game. In such a configuration, the sub-control unit 91 sets the period in which the precursor effect is executed in any of the games during the precursor effect in the same manner as in the precursor period lottery performed by the main control unit 41. A configuration may be adopted that can indicate the possibility that any of the control states of the CZ1 state and the CZ2 state has been won.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment updates the precursor period counter for counting the number of remaining games in the precursor period when shifting the control state relating to the ART by subtracting 1 at the start of the game, and updating at the end of the game. If the number of remaining games in the precursor period is 0 based on the value of the precursor period counter, it is determined that the precursor period has ended. Therefore, the update of the precursor period counter and whether the precursor period based on the precursor period counter has ended. Since the determination of whether or not the sign period is not performed at the same time, it is possible to reliably determine whether or not the sign period has ended based on the updated sign period counter.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can hold a plurality of state transition flags. Even when control is performed during the precursor period, that is, even when at least one state transition flag is set, In a case where predetermined lottery conditions (in this embodiment, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, and common bell are won) are established, a lottery (ART lottery, If any of the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state, the ART, and the added state is won, a state transition flag that can specify the selected control state is further set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, Even if other transition conditions are satisfied during the precursor period, the CZ1 state, CZ2 state, ART, It can be shifted to put state.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can hold a plurality of state transition flags, and when a plurality of state transition flags of different types are held, the main control unit 41 has the most advantageous state for the player. Since the control is performed in the precursory period based on the state transition flag so as to give priority to the higher control state, even if other transitional conditions are satisfied during the precursory period, a plurality of transitions that are satisfied are performed without complicating the processing. The control state can be shifted to the control state with the highest advantage for the player according to the conditions.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can hold a plurality of state transition flags, and when a plurality of state transition flags of different types are held, the main control unit 41 has the most advantageous state for the player. The control is performed in the precursory period based on the state transition flag so as to control in precedence over the control state having a high level.However, when the main control unit 41 holds a plurality of state transition flags of different types, A state transition flag of the next control state to be transitioned based on a degree other than the advantage for the player may be selected, and control may be performed in the precursor period based on the selected state transition flag. The state transition flag for the next control state to be transitioned according to the set order can be selected, or the state transition flag can be randomly selected regardless of the advantage or the set order. Those selected may be used to select the state transition flag by lottery based on the predetermined ratio.

  When the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment holds a plurality of any one of the CZ1 state transition flag and the CZ2 state transition flag, the main control unit 41 terminates the CZ1 state or the CZ2 state as the release condition and transitions to the normal state. Then, control is performed in the precursory period based on the CZ1 state transition flag or the CZ2 state transition flag that is held, and when both the CZ1 state transition flag and the CZ2 state transition flag are held, the CZ1 state Alternatively, when the CZ2 state ends and the normal state is entered, the control is performed in the precursory period based on the CZ2 state transition flag so as to give priority to the CZ2 state that is more advantageous to the player. Even if another transition condition is satisfied, the CZ1 state or CZ1 state is determined according to the plurality of satisfied transition conditions without complicating the processing. It can be shifted to the state.

  Further, when the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment holds a plurality of any one of the ART transition flag and the additional state transition flag, the main control unit 41 retains the same when the transition to the normal state is performed as the release condition. Control is performed in the precursor period based on the ART transition flag or the additional state transition flag, and when both the ART transition flag and the additional state transition flag are held, the transition to the normal state as the release condition is advantageous to the player. Since the control is performed in the precursory period based on the additional state transition flag so that the control is performed in preference to the higher additional state, even if other transition conditions are satisfied during the precursory period, the process is performed without complicating the processing. It is possible to shift to the ART or the additional state according to the established shift condition.

  Further, when the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment holds a plurality of any one of the CZ1 state transition flag and the ART transition flag, the main control unit 41 retains the information when the transition to the normal state is performed as the release condition. Control is performed during the precursory period based on the CZ1 state transition flag or the ART transition flag, and when both the CZ1 state transition flag and the ART transition flag are held, the transition to the normal state as the release condition is advantageous to the player. Since the control is performed in the precursory period based on the ART transition flag so as to give priority to the ART having a higher degree, even if other transitional conditions are satisfied during the precursory period, a plurality of conditions are satisfied without complicating the processing. It is possible to make a transition to the CZ1 state and ART according to the transition condition.

  Further, when the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment holds a plurality of any one of the CZ2 state transition flag and the ART transition flag, the main control unit 41 retains the information when the transition to the normal state is performed as the release condition. Control is performed in the precursory period based on the CZ2 state transition flag or the ART transition flag, and when both the CZ2 state transition flag and the ART transition flag are held, the transition to the normal state as the release condition is advantageous to the player. Since the control is performed in the precursory period based on the ART transition flag so as to give priority to the ART having a higher degree, even if other transitional conditions are satisfied during the precursory period, a plurality of conditions are satisfied without complicating the processing. The transition to the CZ2 state and the ART can be made according to the transition condition.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can set the additional state transition flag in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c when the control state regarding the ART is the normal state, and based on the fact that the additional state transition flag is set. It is possible to set a precursory period and shift to an additional state by the elapse of the precursory period. When the control state related to ART is ART, an additional state transition flag can be set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. Yes, it is possible to set a precursory period based on the fact that the additional state transition flag is set, and to transition to the additional state when the precursory period has elapsed, and the control state relating to the ART is the normal state. Sometimes, when the precursor period is set based on the additional state transition flag, when the control state relating to the ART is ART, In the case where the precursor period is set based on the riding state transition flag, the precursor period is set in common to one precursor period counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, so the precursor according to the set state transition flag is set. The control for specifying the period can be simplified, and the capacity of the storage area for storing the precursor information can be reduced.

  The main control unit 41 of this embodiment performs a lottery (ART lottery, additional state lottery, CZ lottery) to determine whether to shift the control state regarding ART, and determines to shift the control state regarding ART. In this case, before the control state related to the ART is shifted, a precursory period lottery for determining the period to be controlled during the precursory period is performed. In the precursory period lottery, a predetermined ratio is set according to the control state to be shifted. Since the basic period of the precursor period is selected, a predetermined additional period (0 to 3 games) is selected using random numbers, and the sum of the additional periods with respect to the basic period is determined as the number of games in the precursor period. This can be varied in the range of the additional period around the basic period, and the length of the precursor period can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  Note that the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment calculates the sum of the basic period selected based on a predetermined ratio and the additional period selected using random numbers, and determines the sum as the number of games in the precursor period. However, the method of calculating the precursor period is not limited to the sum of the basic period and the additional period. For example, a method of calculating the precursor period by subtracting a predetermined period from the basic period, and multiplying the basic period by a predetermined value Alternatively, a precursor period may be calculated by dividing (for example, a basic period × 0.8 to × 1.2), or a precursor period may be calculated by combining these operations.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment calculates the sum of the basic period selected based on a predetermined ratio and the additional period selected using random numbers, and determines the sum as the number of games in the precursor period. However, the main control unit 41 may be configured to select one period based on a predetermined ratio from a plurality of periods determined in advance and determine the number of games in the precursor period. Alternatively, a configuration may be used in which one value is selected from a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 25 games) by using a random number to determine the number of games in the precursor period. The number of games in the period can be varied within a predetermined range, and the length of the precursor period can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

  Further, when the special role is won by the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets a special role winning flag indicating that the special role has been won in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and Until the RB or BB corresponding to the winning flag wins, the special role winning flag is maintained, and when it is determined to shift the control state relating to the ART, a predetermined precursor period is added to the precursor period counter. It is configured to set and control the precursor period based on the value of the precursor period counter. When the special role is won by the internal lottery, the precursor period counter is reset and the special role winning flag is set. Therefore, every time the game is played, the precursor period counter is reset. It can be prevented from being your.

  In the present embodiment, when the BB or RB is won during the precursor period, the main control unit 41 stops the running precursor period, and when the BB or RB wins, the BB that has won, This is a configuration in which the control of the RB is started, and after the control of the BB and the RB is completed, the control is performed again from the beginning in the precursor period. The control may be performed such that when the control of the winning BB or RB is completed after the suspension, the suspended precursory period is restarted.

  In the present embodiment, when the BB or RB is won during the precursor period, the main control unit 41 stops the running precursor period, and when the BB or RB wins, the BB or the winning BB, This is a configuration in which the control of the RB is started, and after the control of the BB and RB is completed, the control of the precursor period is started on condition that the game state is RT1, but after the control of the BB and RB is completed, the game is started. Even when the state is not RT1, the control for the precursor period may be started on condition that the state transition flag is set when the control of BB and RB is completed.

  In the present embodiment, at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 adds 1 to the ceiling game number counter set in the RAM 41c, and sets a special role winning flag indicating that the special role has been won. Since the ceiling game number counter is reset at the end of the game in the state in which the special role winning flag is set, when the so-called special role is carried over, the ceiling game number counter is reset for each game. Updating (addition of 1) and resetting of the number counter are repeatedly performed, and it is not necessary to provide a process for updating the ceiling game number counter depending on whether the special role is being carried over. It is possible to execute processing related to updating the ceiling game number counter without increasing the capacity.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 updates the ceiling game number counter set in the RAM 41c every time a game is played, and determines whether the value of the ceiling game number counter has reached the specified game number. It is determined that if the number of games has reached the specified number, an ART transition flag is set as a benefit that is advantageous to the player, and if a special combination is won, the ceiling game number counter is reset to 0. . In such a configuration, when the value of the ceiling game number counter reaches the prescribed number of games in the game in which the special role is won, the ceiling game number counter is reset in the game in which the special role is won. Therefore, there is a possibility that a benefit that is advantageous to the player may not be given. In contrast, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment adds 1 to the ceiling game number counter at the start of the game, and then determines whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter has reached the specified game number, If the number of ceiling games has reached the specified number of games, the ceiling game number counter is reset after setting the ART transition flag as an advantage for the player. Even in the case of reaching the prescribed number of games, the player can receive an advantageous privilege.

  In the present embodiment, if the number of games until the special combination is won after the BB or RB control ends has reached the specified number of games, an ART state transition flag is set as an advantage that is advantageous to the player. However, the privilege that is advantageous to the player is not limited to the ART state transition flag, and the right to be able to transition to the gaming state that is advantageous to the player (whether the advantageous gaming state is generated or not). Winning the lottery that determines whether or not a prize for shifting to an advantageous gaming state is permitted), the right to be notified of an operation mode for deriving an advantageous display result for the player, the gaming value It may be a privilege that is directly advantageous to the player, such as a right to be controlled to a gaming state with a high expected value, or may not be directly advantageous to the player. Such as a condition for obtaining the benefits on Tsu door, it may be indirectly advantageous benefits for the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of games until the special role is won after the BB or RB control ends is counted by the ceiling game number counter, and the value of the ceiling game number counter reaches the prescribed game number. Is provided on the condition that the special benefit is provided to the player, but the condition for providing the benefit provided to the player is a game from the end of BB or RB until the special role is won. The number of games is not limited to the specified number of games, and may be configured on condition that the number of games until the ART or the additional state is won after the control of the ART has reached the specified number. Alternatively, the configuration may be such that the number of games until the BB or RB, ART, or additional state is won after the control of BB or RB or ART is completed has reached a specified number. .

  Next, the control content of the internal winning command transmission process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the present embodiment, a winning number is assigned in advance for each type of lottery target role, and a lottery target role that may be carried over, that is, a special role winning number table in which a winning number for each type of special role is set, A lottery target combination that is not carried over, that is, a general combination winning number table in which a winning number is set for each type of general combination is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b.

  As shown in FIG. 31, in the special role winning number table, when no special role has been won, that is, the winning number of the loss is “0”, the winning number of BB is “1”, and the winning number of RB is The winning number is assigned “1”.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 32, in the general role winning number table, if no general role has been won, that is, if the general role has been lost, “0” is the winning number, and the winning number of the normal replay is “1”. ", The winning number of the replay GR1 is" 2 ", the winning number of the replay GR2 is" 3 ", the winning number of the replay GR3 is" 4 ", and the winning number of the replay GR4 is" 5 ". The winning number of the replay GR5 is “6”, the winning number of the replay GR6 is “7”, the winning number of the replay GR11 is “8”, and the winning number of the replay GR12 is “9”. The winning number of GR13 is "10", the winning number of replay GR14 is "11", the winning number of replay GR15 is "12", the winning number of replay GR16 is "13", and the replay GR21 is Winning numbers, "14", winning numbers of replay GR22 is, "15", winning numbers of replay GR23 is, "16", winning numbers of the promotion replay, "17" has been assigned. In addition, the winning number of the strong cherry is “20”, the winning number of the weak cherry is “21”, and the winning number of the watermelon is “22”. The winning number of the left bell 1 is “23”, the winning number of the left bell 2 is “24”, the winning number of the left bell 3 is “25”, and the winning number of the left bell 4 is “ 26, the winning number of the middle bell 1 is “27”, the winning number of the middle bell 2 is “28”, the winning number of the middle bell 3 is “29”, and the winning number of the middle bell 4 is , "30", the winning number of the right bell 1 is "31", the winning number of the right bell 2 is "32", the winning number of the right bell 3 is "33", the winning of the right bell 4 The number is assigned “34”, and the winning number of the common bell is assigned “35”.

  As described above, in the special role winning number table and the general role winning number table, the lottery target roles of the internal lottery and the winning numbers are set correspondingly.

  In the present embodiment, when a start operation is performed, the main control unit 41 executes an internal lottery process, and when any of the special role and the general role is won in the internal lottery, Then, the winning number corresponding to the lottery target combination determined to be won is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and if no combination is won, the winning number corresponding to the loss is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. The winning number indicating the winning of the general role is cleared at the end of each game, while the winning number indicating the winning of the special role is maintained until the winning special role is won, and the winning special role wins. Cleared.

  After setting the winning number, the main control unit 41 executes an internal winning command setting process, and based on the internal winning number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command. The command is set in the command queue, and the first internal winning command and the second internal winning command are transmitted to the sub control unit 91 by the subsequent timer interrupt processing (main).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, in the internal winning command setting process, first, the winning number of the special combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is acquired (Sf1), and the acquired winning number is obtained. , Is set as a transmission winning number to be transmitted to the sub control unit 91 in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf2), and the first internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number. The command transmitted by the main control unit 41 is composed of 2 bytes, the first byte represents MODE (classification of command), the second byte represents EXT (contents of command), and 41 stores a MODE indicating that it is the first internal winning command in the first byte when storing the first internal winning command in the command queue, and transmits the special winning combination for transmission in the EXT of the second byte. Store the number.

  After the first internal winning command is stored in the step Sf3, the winning number of the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is acquired (Sf4), and if the acquired winning number is less than 2, It is sequentially determined whether or not there is (Sf5), whether or not it is less than 14 (Sf6), whether or not it is less than 23 (Sf7), and whether or not it is less than 35 (Sf8). It is determined which of the plurality of predetermined ranges the number is in.

  If it is determined in step Sf5 that the winning number is less than 2, that is, if the winning number is 0 or 1, the winning number obtained for transmission to the sub control unit 91 is transmitted. The number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf9). If it is determined in step Sf5 that the winning number is not less than 2, and if it is determined in step Sf6 that it is less than 14, that is, if the winning number is any of 2 to 13, the winning number for transmission is determined. 2 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf10). If it is determined in step Sf6 that the winning number is not less than 14, and if it is determined in step Sf7 that it is less than 23, that is, if the winning number is any of 20 to 22, the winning number is The transmission winning number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf9). If it is determined in step Sf7 that the winning number is not less than 23, and if it is determined in step Sf8 that it is less than 35, that is, if the winning number is any of 23 to 34, the transmission winning number is determined. 23 is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf10). If it is determined in step Sf8 that the winning number is not less than 35, that is, if the winning number is 35, the winning number is set as a transmission winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sf9).

  Then, after setting the transmission winning number of the general combination in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the steps Sf9, Sf10 and Sf11, the second internal winning command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission winning number. When storing the second internal winning command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores MODE indicating that the command is the second internal winning command in the first byte, and uses the EXT in the second byte as a general role. Stores the winning number for transmission.

  After the second internal winning command is stored in the command queue in step Sf10, the internal winning command setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process (main).

  As described above, in the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment, the winning number of the special combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is set as the transmission winning number, and the first winning number including the transmission winning number is set. Set the internal winning command in the command queue.

  In the internal winning command setting process of the present embodiment, the winning number of the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery process is within the first predetermined range (0 to 1, 14 to 22, 35). In this case, the winning number is set as the transmission winning number, and the second internal winning command including the transmission winning number is set in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command transmitted when a winning number within the first predetermined range (0 to 1, 14 to 22, 35) is set in the internal winning, the command is added to the command. The winning number by the internal lottery can be specified based on the transmission winning number included.

  On the other hand, when the winning number is within the second predetermined range (2 to 13), one winning number (2) included in the second predetermined range is set as the transmission winning number, and the transmission winning number is set. The second internal winning command including the number is set in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command that is transmitted when a winning number within the second predetermined range (2 to 13) is set in the internal winning, the transmission winning number included in the command is included. , It is not possible to specify which one of the winning numbers is in the second predetermined range (2 to 13), while the winning number is within the second predetermined range (2 to 13). You can identify something.

  If the winning number is within the third predetermined range (23 to 34), one winning number (23) included in the third predetermined range is set as the transmission winning number, and the transmission winning number is set. The second internal winning command including the number is set in the command queue. As a result, in the second internal winning command to be transmitted when a winning number within the third predetermined range (23 to 34) is set in the internal winning, the transmission winning number included in the command is transmitted. , It is not possible to specify which of the numbers in the third predetermined range (23-34) the winning number is, while the winning number is within the third predetermined range (23-34). You can identify something.

  The first internal winning command and the second internal winning command set in the internal winning command setting process of this embodiment are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by executing the timer interrupt process (main) thereafter. Will be transmitted sequentially.

  Note that the main control unit 41 of this embodiment is configured to transmit a command composed of 2 bytes to the sub-control unit 91. However, the form of the command shown in this embodiment is an example, A form may be used. Further, in the present embodiment, the commands are composed of 2-byte signals, but these commands may be composed of 1-byte signals or signals of 3 bytes or more.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to transmit a first internal winning command and a second internal winning command each composed of 2 bytes to the sub-control unit 91. Although the configuration includes the transmission winning number in the byte, the form of the command shown in the present embodiment is an example, and other data forms may be used. For example, a first internal winning command, a second internal Each of the winning commands is composed of a 3-byte signal, and the third byte includes a transmission winning number for a special role or a transmission winning number for a general role, a first internal winning command, and a second internal winning command. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one signal composed of three bytes is used, the transmission winning number for the special role is included in the second byte, and the transmission winning number for the general role is included in the third byte.

  In the present embodiment, the winning numbers of the special role and the general role are separately allocated and assigned, that is, the special role winning number corresponding to the type and the special role (BB, RB) of the special role in the special role winning number table. The main control unit 41 sets the winning number of the special role according to the result of the internal lottery, and sets the winning number of the general role in accordance with the type and loss of the general role in the general role winning number table. The configuration is such that the winning number of the role is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, but the winning number is assigned without being divided into the special role and the general role, for example, “BB”, “small role”, “BB + win simultaneously”. A small winning combination (for example, BB + strong cherry or the like shown in FIG. 19) may be assigned a winning number as one lottery target combination. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 sets one winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c according to the result of the internal lottery, so that the special role and the small role win based on only the one winning number. It is possible to perform a predetermined control (setting of an internal winning flag, navigating notification, command creation, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, etc.) by determining whether or not the control is performed.

  Next, control contents of the push order command transmission process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32, 34, and 35.

  In the present embodiment, navigation numbers (0 to 9) that can identify the reel stop order based on the navigation notification are assigned in advance, and among the lottery targets, the notification target combination is assigned a navigation number in advance for each type. A navigation number table in which a navigation number for each type of lottery target combination is set is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b.

  As shown in FIG. 34, the navigation number is 0 indicating a standard pressing order (in this embodiment, a stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop), and a stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop, that is, the left number. 1 indicating 1 stop, stop order in which the middle reel 2C is the first stop, that is, 2 indicating the middle first stop, stop order in which the right reel 2R is the first stop, 3 indicating the right first stop, 1st stop. A left reel 2L, a second stop is a middle reel 2C, a third stop is a right reel 2R, indicating a stop order 4, a first stop is a left reel 2L, a second stop is a right reel 2R, and a third stop is a middle reel 2C. 5, the first stop is the middle reel 2C, the second stop is the left reel 2L, the third stop is the right reel 2R, the stop order is 6, the first stop is the middle reel 2C, the second stop Indicates a stop order with the right reel 2R and the third stop being the left reel 2L. The stop order is 8 indicating the stop order with the right reel 2L, the second stop is the left reel 2L, the third stop is the middle reel 2C, the first stop is the right reel 2R, the second stop is the middle reel 2C, and the third stop is the left. 9 indicating the stop order of the reels 2L is set.

  In this embodiment, the stop order in which the left reel 2L is the first stop is applied as the standard push order specified by the navigation number 0, but the standard push order is disadvantageously advantageous for the player. May be another stop order as long as it is a standard push order.

  As shown in FIG. 32, in the navigation number table, the navigation number is set for each type of the notification target role among the lottery target roles, and the left bell 1, the left bell 2, the left bell 3, and the left bell 4 are set. Is "1", for the middle bell 1, middle bell 2, middle bell 3, and middle bell 4, "2" is for right bell 1, right bell 2, right bell 3, and right bell 4, "3". Is set, "4" is set for the replay GR1, "5" is set for the replay GR2, "6" is set for the replay GR3, "7" is set for the replay GR4, and "5" is set for the replay GR5. “8” is set, and “9” is set for the replay GR6.

  Further, for the replay GRs 11 to 16, the navigation number is set according to the winning situation of the additional lottery described above. When the additional lottery is not won, the navigation number 1 is set for the replay GR11 and the replay GR12. For the replay GR13 and the replay GR14, the navigation number 2 is set, and for the replay GR15 and the replay GR16, the navigation number 3 is set. 2, the navigation number 3 is set for the replay GR12 and the replay GR13, and the navigation number 1 is set for the replay GR14 and the replay GR15.

  It should be noted that the navigation numbers are not set for the regular replay, replay GR21 to 23, promotion replay, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, and common bell which are not the notification targets among the lottery targets.

  In this embodiment, when the start operation is performed and the stop operation of each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is performed, the main control unit 41 wins the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c. A push order command setting process for setting the push order command corresponding to the number in the command queue is executed, and the push order command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by the subsequent timer interrupt process (main).

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 35, in the pressing order command setting process, first, the winning number of the general combination set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the internal lottery processing is obtained (Sg1), and then the predetermined area of the RAM 41c is obtained. Whether or not the navigation notification is being performed (when the navigation notification is performed during AT or non-AT) with reference to a predetermined flag indicating whether or not the navigation notification is set to Is determined (Sg2). If it is determined in step Sg2 that the navigation notification is not performed, it is determined whether or not the hand to stop on the payline LN is determined based on the stopping status of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the result of the internal lottery. (Sg5), and if the role of stopping at the payline LN is not determined, the standard navigation number (0 in the present embodiment) is set as a transmission navigation number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sg6).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step Sg2 that the navigation notification is performed, and when it is determined in step Sg5 that the role of stopping on the payline LN is determined, the information is stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. Referring to the navigation number table (see FIG. 32), the navigation number corresponding to the winning number of the general combination acquired in step Sg1 is set as a transmission navigation number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  At this time, if it is specified that the replays GR1 to GR6 have been won based on the internal winning number, the stop order in which the combination of the promotion replays is stopped on the pay line LN according to the type of the winning combination is determined. The indicated navigation number is set as the transmission navigation number. When it is specified that the replays GR11 to GR16 have been won and that the replay GRs have not been won in the additional lottery, the combination of the middle replays is displayed on the winning line LN according to the type of the winning combination. The navigation number indicating the stop order to be stopped is set as the transmission navigation number. If it is specified that the replays GR11 to GR16 have been won, and if it is specified that they have won the additional lottery, a combination of special replays is displayed on the payline LN according to the type of the winning combination. The navigation number indicating the stop order to be stopped is set as the transmission navigation number.

  If it is specified that the left bell 1-4, the middle bell 1-4, and the right bell 1-4 are elected based on the internal election number, the middle bell is selected according to the type of the winning combination. The navigation number indicating the stop order in which the combination is stopped on the payline LN is set as the transmission navigation number.

  After setting the transmission navigation number in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c in the step Sg3 or the step Sg6, the pressing order command is stored in the command queue based on the transmission navigation number (Sg4). When storing the pressing order command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores MODE indicating the pressing order command in the first byte, and stores the transmission navigation number in EXT in the second byte.

  After the pressing order command is stored in the command queue in step Sg4, the pressing order command setting process ends, and the process returns to the main process (main).

  As described above, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the pressing order command setting process when the start operation is performed, which is advantageous to the player when the navigation notification is being performed. If the push order command that can specify the stop order is set in the command queue, and the navigation notification is not being executed, it is impossible to specify the stop order that is advantageous for the player, and it is disadvantageous or advantageous for the player to be standard. A push order command that can specify a typical push order is set in the command queue.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the pressing order command setting process every time the stop operation is performed, so that even if the navigation notification is not being executed, the main control unit 41 stops on the winning line LN. Is determined, a pressing order command that can specify an advantageous stopping order for the player is set in the command queue.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes the pressing order command setting process, for example, when the replay GR1 is won in a state where the gaming state is RT1 and the navigation notification is not performed. When none of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, the promotion replay and the middle replay can be stopped. However, since it is not determined which combination will stop, the standard navigation number (“0”) is used. Is set as the transmission navigation number, and the pressing order command including the transmission navigation number is set. Further, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, the promotion replay and the middle replay can still be stopped, and it is not yet determined which combination will stop. Therefore, the standard navigation number ("" 0 "). When the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop and then the middle reel 2C is stopped as the second stop, only the promotion replay can be stopped by stopping the right reel 2R thereafter, and the role to be stopped is determined. Therefore, even if the navigation notification is not performed, the navigation number (“4”) that can specify the stop order (stop order for winning the promotion replay) advantageous to the player is used as the transmission navigation number. Is set. When the reels other than the left reel 2L are stopped at the first stop, after the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, and when the reels other than the middle reel 2C are stopped as the second stop, the subsequent stop is performed. Regardless of the order, only the middle replay can be stopped, and the role to be stopped is determined. Therefore, even when navigation notification is not performed, a navigation number (“" 4 ") is set as the transmission navigation number.

  In addition, when the replay GR2 to 6 is won in a state where the gaming state is RT1 and the navigation notification is not performed, either the promotion replay or the middle replay is performed in the same manner as when the replay GR1 is won. When it is not determined whether to stop, a push order command including the standard navigation number (“0”) is set, and it is advantageous for the player when it is determined whether the role of the promotion replay or the middle replay is to be stopped. A push order command including a navigation number that can specify a desired stop order is set.

  Also, for example, the replay GR11 is won in a state where the gaming state is RT0 and the navigation notification is not performed. Although the fall replay can be stopped, it is not determined which role will stop, so the standard navigation number ("0"), which cannot specify the stop order of the replay GR11, is set as the transmission navigation number. Then, a pressing order command including the transmission navigation number is set. Then, when the left reel 2L is stopped as the first stop, only the middle replay can be stopped, and the role to be stopped is determined. Therefore, even if the navigation notification is not performed, an advantageous stop for the player. A navigation number ("2") that can specify the order (the order in which special replays are won) is set as the transmission navigation number. Further, when the middle reel 2C is stopped as the first stop, it is determined that only the special replay is stopped, so that the navigation number (“2”) that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player is transmitted. When the right reel 2 </ b> R is stopped as the first stop and the right reel 2 </ b> R is stopped, it is determined that only the fall replay is stopped. ) Is set as the transmission navigation number.

  Also, when the replay GR12 to 16 is won in a state where the gaming state is RT0 and the navigation notification is not performed, any of the middle replay, the special replay, and the fall replay are performed in the same manner as when the replay GR11 is won. If it is not determined whether the hand will stop, a push order command including the standard navigation number ("0") is set, and it is determined which of the middle replay, the special replay, and the fall replay will stop. In addition, a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player (a stop order for winning a special replay) is set.

  Also, when the left bell 1-4, the middle bell 1-4, and the right bell 1-4 are won in a state where the navigation notification is not performed, similarly to the case where the replay GR1-6 is won, the middle bell is won. If it is not determined which of the upper bells 1 to 8 is to be stopped, a push order command including the standard navigation number (“0”) is set. A push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player (stop order for winning the middle bell) is set.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the notification target role is won in a state where the control of the AT is not performed, the main control unit 41 determines the stop order advantageous to the player and determines the stop order. A push order command including a navigation number capable of specifying an advantageous stop order is set and transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The timing at which the advantageous stop order is determined is the timing at which the first stop operation is performed in the three-choice combination (replay GR11 to replay GR11 to 16), and the six-choice combination (replay GR1 to replay GR6). In this case, the timing at which the first stop operation is performed and it is determined that the advantageous combination for the player does not stop, or the timing at which the second stop operation is performed.

  The push order command set in the push order command setting process of this embodiment is subsequently transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by executing a timer interrupt process (main).

  Then, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the navigation notification is being performed on the main control unit 41 based on the pressing order command, the first internal winning command, and the second internal winning command described above. Next, perform a navigation effect. When performing the navigation effect, the sub-control unit 91 specifies the winning of the notification target role based on the second internal winning command, and the navigation number is other than “0” based on the pressing order command. That is, when it is specified that the pushing order advantageous to the player is other than the standard pushing order, the liquid crystal display 51 displays the stop order image indicating the stopping order corresponding to the navigation number specified based on the pushing order command. To be displayed. In the navigation effect, the liquid crystal display 51 displays an image indicating a possible winning combination based on the second internal winning command. At this time, for example, if the pushing order bell has been won as the notification target role, displaying the image of "bell" indicates the possibility of winning of the pushing order bell, and the pushing order replay is won. If there is, the type of the replay GR having a possibility of winning is specified based on the game state (RT0 to RT3) on the main control unit 41 side specified based on the game state command and the like, and the specified replay By performing an effect in accordance with the role included in the GR (for example, in the case of replay GR1-6, promotion replay, in the case of replay GR11-16, special replay), it is suggested that there is a possibility of winning a role that is advantageous to the player. Is available.

  Further, as an effect corresponding to the role included in the replay GR in the navigation effect, for example, even when the replay GRs 11 to 16 are won in the internal lottery, in the internal winning command transmission process on the main control unit 41 side, the second internal As the winning number for transmission of the winning command, "2" indicating the winning of any of the replays GR1 to GR6 and 11 to 16 is uniformly set, but the sub-control unit 91 sets the second internal winning command to By specifying that the transmission winning number is “2” based on the transmission status and the gaming state is RT1 based on the gaming state command or the like, it is determined that the replays GR11 to GR16 are winning. The special replay can be won by the operation in the stop order, together with the image indicating the stop order according to the navigation number specified based on the push order command. (In the present embodiment, an image indicating a combination of symbols constituting a special replay) is displayed, so that a role that is advantageous to the player among the roles included in the replays GR11 to GR16 (in the present embodiment, It is possible to perform an effect according to the role that is shifted to RT2 when the additional state lottery is won.

  Next, the control content of the winning determination command transmission process performed by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  In the present embodiment, a winning number (0 to 55) is pre-assigned for each type of winning combination for the special combination and the general combination. Stored in the area.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the winning numbers are assigned for each type of winning combination, that is, for each combination of symbols stopped on the winning line LN, and “Replay a-Cherry a-Cherry a” of the upper bell 1 is “ “1”, “Replay a-Cherry a-White 7” is “2”, “Replay a-Cherry a-BAR” is “3”, and “Replay a-Cherry b-Cherry a” is “ “4” is assigned to “Replay a-cherry b-white 7”, “5” is assigned to “Replay a-cherry b-BAR”, and “6” is assigned to “Replay a-cherry b-BAR 7”. “Plum” is assigned “7”, “Replay a-cherry b-plum” is assigned “8”, and “Replay a-plum-cherry a” of the upper bell 3 is assigned “9” and “Replay a -Plum-White 7 "is replaced by" 10 " “Plum-BAR” is assigned “11”, upper bell 4 “Replay a-plum-plum” is assigned “12”, and upper bell 5 “Replay b-cherry a-cherry a” is "13", "Replay b-Cherry a-White 7", "14", "Replay b-Cherry a-BAR", "15", "Replay b-Cherry b-Cherry a" “16” is assigned to “Replay b-cherry b-white 7”, “17” is assigned to “Replay b-cherry b-BAR”, and “18” is assigned to “Replay b-cherry b-white a”. “-Plum” is assigned “19”, “replay b-cherry b-plum” is assigned “20”, and “replay b-plum-cherry a” of the upper bell 7 is assigned “21” and “replay b-cherry b-plum”. b-Plum-White 7 "Is," replay b- plum -BAR "is," 23 "is assigned," replay a- plum of the upper bell 8 - plum "is," 24 "has been assigned.

  In addition, “25” is assigned to “Bell-Bell-Bell” of the middle bell, and “26” is assigned to “Replay a-Bell-Red 7” of the downward-sloping bell, and “Replay a-Bell-Replay a” Is assigned “27”, “Replay b-bell-red 7” is assigned “28”, and “Replay b-bell-replay a” is assigned “29”.

  Further, “30” is assigned to “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” of the middle watermelon, and “31” is assigned to “bell-watermelon-cherry b” of watermelon falling to the right. In addition, “32” is assigned to “red 7-bell-bell” of corner cherry 1 and “33” is assigned to “BAR-bell-bell”, and “red 7-bell-replay” of corner cherry 2 is assigned. “a” is assigned “34”, and “BAR-Bell-Replaya” is assigned “35”.

  As shown in FIG. 15, “36” is assigned to “replay a-replay a-replay a” of the middle replay, and “37” is assigned to “replay b-replay a-replay a”. "Bell-Replay a-Red 7" is assigned "38", "Bell-Replay a-Bell" is assigned "39", and "Bell-Replay a-Replay a" of the promoted replay is "40". "Bell-Red 7-Cherry a" is "41", "Bell-Red 7-watermelon" is "42", and "Bell-red 7-plum" is "43". "Bell-watermelon-cherry a" is "44", "Bell-watermelon-watermelon" is "45", "Bell-watermelon-plum" is "46", "Bell-cherry" "A-Cherry a" is "47", but "Bell-Cherry a- “Squid” is assigned “48”, “Bell-cherry a-plum” is assigned “49”, and special replay “Replay a-replay a-bell” is assigned “50” and “Replay b-replay” “a-bell” is assigned “51”.

  Also, “52” is assigned to “Replay b-Blue 7-Replay a” of the red 7 matching replay, and “53” is assigned to “Cherry a-Blue 7-Replay a” of the blue 7 matching replay. “54” is assigned to “replay a-blue 7-replay a” of the missing replay a, and “55” is assigned to “bell-blue 7-replay a” of the missing replay b.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 13, “64” is assigned to “blue 7-blue 7-blue 7” of BB, and “65” is assigned to “blue 7-red 7-red 7” of RB. ing.

  In the present embodiment, after the start operation has been performed, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R have stopped, the main control unit 41 responds to the combination of the symbols stopped on each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R. A prize determination process is performed to determine whether or not a prize has occurred. In the winning determination process, for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, it is determined whether or not the combination of the symbols constituting the winning combination is stopped on the winning line LN, and the combination of the symbols constituting the winning combination is stopped. When it is determined that the winning combination corresponding to the stopped symbol combination is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c while referring to the winning number table, the symbol combination forming the winning combination is determined. Is determined not to be stopped, "0" indicating a loss is set as a winning number in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the winning determination process is terminated.

  Then, after executing the winning determination process, the main control unit 41 executes a winning determination command setting process of setting a winning determination command capable of specifying a winning number in a command queue.

  As shown in FIG. 36, in the winning determination command setting process, a winning number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c is obtained based on the winning determination result in the winning determining process (Sh1), and based on the winning number, a winning determination command is obtained. Is stored in the command queue (Sh2), and the winning determination command setting process ends. When storing the winning determination command in the command queue, the main control unit 41 stores MODE indicating that the command is the winning determination command in the first byte, and stores the winning number in EXT of the second byte.

  The winning determination command set in the winning determination command setting process is subsequently transmitted to the sub-control unit 91 by executing a timer interrupt process (main).

  As described above, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the main control unit 41 executes the winning determination command setting process to set a winning determination command including a winning number, A winning determination command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91.

  In the prize determination command setting process of this embodiment, a prize determination command including the prize number set in the RAM 41c in the prize determination process is set in the command queue. The processing load can be reduced without performing the conversion process.

  In the present embodiment, a winning number is assigned to each type of winning combination and stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 41b. Therefore, the sub-control unit 91 that has received the winning determination command including the winning number uses the winning number based on the winning number. Thus, it is possible to specify the combination of symbols stopped on each of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R and execute the effect.

  A conventional slot machine is configured to include a game control unit for controlling a game and a production control unit for controlling a production, and the game control unit outputs an internal lottery result when a predetermined notification target role is won. In response to this, it is determined whether or not to control the AT in which the navigation notification for executing the operation procedure of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is executed. If the AT is controlled, the navigation notification is executed and the internal lottery result is determined. Irrespective of whether or not the AT is controlling the internal winning command which can specify the AT, the effect controlling unit specifies the internal lottery result based on the internal winning command, and controls the game control. In the case where the AT is controlled by the AT, the navigation effect for notifying the operation procedure advantageous to the player is performed based on the specified internal lottery result.

  In such a configuration, the effect control unit can specify an operation procedure that is advantageous to the player based on the internal winning command regardless of whether the effect control is performed by the AT. Is performed, an operation procedure advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result is specified from the internal winning command, although the game control unit does not determine that the control is performed by the AT, and the operation procedure is determined. There is a possibility of being notified by the effect control unit.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment, as an internal lottery command that can specify the internal lottery result, the first internal lottery command that can specify the winning status of the special role as the internal lottery result and the general role In the internal winning command setting process, a second internal winning command capable of specifying a winning situation can be set, and the set command can be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In the internal winning command setting process, the AT is controlled by the AT. Regardless of whether or not it has been done, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target role, it can be specified that the notification target role has been won, but it is not possible to specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player. Since the second internal winning command relating to the role is set, regardless of whether the AT is controlled by the main control unit 41 side, the second internal winning command is converted to the internal lottery result. A common second internal winning command is transmitted regardless of whether the AT is controlled or not, without specifying an advantageous stop order for the player who has stopped. Such processing can be simplified, and even if the sub-control unit 91 is fraudulently performed, it is possible to prevent a stop order advantageous to the player from being notified by the navigation effect in a state where the AT is not controlled.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to notify the stop order of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, which is advantageous for the player, by the navigating notification according to the notification target role selected by the internal winning. The control unit 41 uses the navigation notification to operate at any one of a plurality of different operation timings, to operate at any one of a plurality of operation orders, and to operate at a combination thereof. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 determines that the notification target role has been won regardless of whether the AT is controlled by the main control unit 41 side. However, by setting the second internal winning command so that an operation mode advantageous to the player cannot be specified, the second internal winning frame is set on the sub-control unit 91 side. Advantageous operation mode is not be identified for the player in accordance with the internal lottery result from de.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the notification target role for executing the navigation notification by the main control unit 41 includes a pressing order replay and a pressing order bell. When the result becomes the notification target role, the second internal winning command is set so that the notification target role can be identified as the pressing order replay or the pressing order bell, and the sub control unit 91 is set. When the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, the sub control unit 91 can specify whether the notification target combination is the pressing order replay or the pressing order bell, and the sub control unit 91 It is also possible to perform different effects depending on the type of the notification target role.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls the AT, and specifies the stop order advantageous to the player when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination in the state where the navigation notification is executed. A push order command setting process for setting a possible push order command is executed, and the set push order command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. It is possible to perform a navigation effect that notifies an advantageous stop order.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the notification target role in which the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification, the pressing order replay and the pressing order bell are included, and the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification in the pressing order command setting process. When the internal lottery result is the push order replay and the push order bell is played in the state where it is performed, that is, when the notification target role won in the internal lottery in the state where the navigation notification is executed is a different type, Also, when a stop order advantageous to the player is common, a push order command including a common navigation number that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player is set, so that the type of the push order command can be reduced. it can.

  Further, in the push order command setting process, the main control unit 41 specifies a stop order that is advantageous to the player when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination in the state where the navigation notification is executed. While setting the push order command including the available navigation number, in a state other than the state where the navigation notification is executed, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target role, it is not possible to specify an advantageous stop order for the player, Since the push order command including the navigation number that can specify the standard push order (first left stop) is set, the internal lottery result becomes the notification target role regardless of whether the navigation notification is executed or not. In some cases, the process of setting the pressing order command including the navigation number can be shared.

  In addition, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment is configured to stop the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R stepwise each time the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated, which is an advantageous stop for the player. The order is determined before all the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R are operated, that is, before the third stop operation is completed. For example, when the push order bell is won, the first stop operation is performed. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the middle bell is won. At the time of winning the replays GR11 to GR16, whether or not the special replay is won by the first stop operation is determined, and the replay is performed. At the time of winning of GR1 to GR6, the second stop operation is performed to determine whether or not the promotion replay is won. In the process, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed, the stage in which the advantageous stop order for the player is determined, that is, the first stop and the second stop operation are performed. After that, since a push order command including a navigation number that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player according to the internal winning result is set and transmitted, even if the sub-control unit 91 is improperly executed, While the internal lottery result is the notification target combination, the sub-control unit 91 determines whether the player has operated in the stop order advantageous to the player while preventing the stop order advantageous to the player from being specified. You can make a production.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs a stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R when the notification target role is won in a state other than the state in which the navigation notification is executed in the pressing order command setting processing. Is performed and when it is determined that the combination to be stopped is determined, a push order command including a navigation number capable of specifying a stop order advantageous to the player is set, and the push order command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. After the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is performed and the role to stop is determined, a command that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player is different from the push order command. It may be a command, for example, by transmitting another command including the winning number of the notification target role won by the internal lottery, it is advantageous for the player based on the type of the notification target role that has been won. It may be configured to allow identifying stop order, separately may be configured to provide a command containing identifiable navigation ID favorable stop order for the player. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 executes the pressing order command setting process only when the internal lottery is performed, and thereafter, when the role to be stopped is determined, the stopping order that is advantageous to the player. By performing a process of setting a command that can specify the command, the load related to the transmission of the pressing order command by the main control unit 41 can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to execute the pressing order command setting process when the internal lottery is performed and when the stop operation of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is performed. After the role to be stopped is determined, every time the pressing order command setting process is performed, a pressing order command that can specify a stopping order advantageous to the player is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The push order command that can specify a stop order advantageous to the player after the role to be played is determined may be configured to be transmitted at least once when the role to be stopped is determined. The configuration may be such that the push order command setting process is not performed after the push order command that can specify the stop order that is advantageous to the user is transmitted. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load related to transmission of the pressing order command by the main control unit 41.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs a push order command setting process when an internal lottery is performed or a stop operation of each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is performed in a state in which the navigation notification is performed. However, in the case where the navigation notification is performed, the pressing order command setting process may be performed only when the internal lottery is performed. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the load related to the transmission of the pressing order command by the main control unit 41 when the navigation notification is performed.

  When a start operation is performed, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs an internal lottery, sets a different winning number for each internal lottery result in the RAM 41c according to the internal lottery result, and sets the set winning number. The internal winning flag setting, navigation notification, command creation, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, etc. are performed in accordance with the internal lottery flag. A first internal winning command that can be specified and a second internal winning command that can specify the winning status of the general role are set in the internal winning command setting process, and the set command is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. The winning number when the notification target role is won as an internal winning result is within a predetermined numerical range (the winning number of the push order replay as the notification target role is 2 to 2). 3, and the winning number of the pressing order bell is 23 to 34.) In the internal winning command setting processing, the AT is controlled and the navigation notification is executed. In any other state, when the winning number set in the RAM 41c falls within the predetermined numerical range (2 to 13, 23 to 34), it can be specified that the winning combination has been set as a notification target combination, but the stop is advantageous to the player. Since the second internal winning command whose order cannot be specified is set and the set second internal winning command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, it is determined whether or not the AT is controlled by the main control unit 41. Regardless, the stop order advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result is not specified from the second internal winning command, so that even if the sub-control unit 91 is fraudulent, the AT is controlled by the AT. Advantageous stop order for the player can be prevented from being informed by the navigation performance with no state.

  In addition, as the winning number set when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination, a continuous numerical value having a predetermined numerical range is assigned, and the main control unit 41 determines that the internal lottery result is the notification target combination. Can be determined based on whether or not the winning number used in performing the predetermined control is within a predetermined numerical value range allocated to the notification target role, so that the second internal winning command is transmitted. Can be simplified.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the notification target role in which the main control unit 41 executes the navigation notification, includes a pressing order replay and a pressing order bell, a winning number when the internal lottery result is the pressing order replay, That is, the internal lottery results are assigned consecutive numbers in the first numerical range (2 to 13) as the winning numbers of the lottery target roles of the replay GR1 to GR6 and the replay GR11 to replay GR16. When the winning number, that is, the internal lottery result is the winning number of each lottery target combination of the left bell 1-4, the middle bell 1-4, and the right bell 1-4, the second numerical range (23-34) Since consecutive numerical values are assigned, the main control unit 41 determines whether the winning number falls within the first numerical range or the second numerical range when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target combination. Depending on the internal lottery result Or is a push order replay, because it can determine whether the push order bell, can be simplified processing for setting the second internal winning command in internal winning command setting process.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the first state (RT0, RT1, RT2) and the second state (for example, RT1 or RT2 with respect to RT0 as the first state, as the first state). RT1 or RT2 for RT1, and RT0 or RT1 for RT2 as the first state) to control a plurality of game states (RT0 to 4, RB). In each game state, The types of the push order replays as the notification target combinations determined in the internal lottery are different (in the present embodiment, for example, in RT0, the replays GR11 to 16 are the lottery target combinations while the replays GR1 to GR6 are the lottery target combinations. Rather, in RT1, replay GR1-6 is a lottery target role, while replay GR11-16 is not a lottery target role, and in RT2, replay GR1-6, replay GR 1 to 16 are not the lottery target combinations, but the gaming state RT0 to RT2, the type of the notification target role to be internally won is different). And the winning number when the internal lottery result is the pressing order replay in the second state of the gaming state is assigned to the first numerical range (2 to 13). Therefore, in the internal winning command setting processing, the processing for determining whether or not the internal lottery result is the pressing order replay in both the first state and the second state can be shared.

  Further, in the internal winning command setting process, when the internal lottery result is a role other than the notification target role or a loss in the state where the AT is not controlled in the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 responds to the internal lottery result. A second internal winning command including the winning number (0 to 1, 14 to 22, 35 in the present embodiment) is set, and when the internal lottery result is the push order replay that is the notification target role, the first internal winning command is set. If the winning number includes one winning number (2 in this embodiment) included in the numerical range (2 to 13) and the internal lottery result is the push order bell which is the notification target combination, the second numerical range (23 to 34) ), A second internal winning command including one winning number (23 in this embodiment) is included, so that the internal lottery result is a notification target role in a state where the AT is not controlled. Also the target of notification The second internal winning command including the winning number corresponding to the internal lottery result is transmitted to the second internal winning command regardless of whether the internal lottery result is the notification target role. Processing for creating and transmitting a command can be shared.

  In the internal winning command setting process, the main control unit 41 sets the notification target role when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target role, regardless of whether the state is controlled by the AT. Although it is possible to specify that the winning has been achieved, the second internal winning command relating to the general combination is set so that it is not possible to specify an advantageous stopping order for the player, but when the state is not controlled by the AT. When the internal lottery result becomes the notification target role, it can be specified that the notification target role has been won, but the second internal winning for the general role can be specified so that a stop order advantageous to the player cannot be specified. While the command is being set, when the AT is controlled, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target role, a winning number corresponding to the type of the notification target role that has been won, for example, the push order The AT is controlled by setting a second internal winning command including the winning number “27” when the replay GR11 is won as the ray and the middle bell 1 as the pushing order bell when the replay GR11 is won. In this state, the second internal winning command capable of specifying the type of the winning notification target combination may be transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. In such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, it is possible to specify a stop order that is advantageous to the player according to the type of the notification target combination from the winning number included in the second internal winning command. The control unit 91 can notify a stop order advantageous to the player by a navigation effect. Further, in such a configuration, in the state controlled by the AT, the winning number of the lottery target role in the internal lottery can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command. For example, when the replay GR11 has been won, an effect that indicates a possibility of winning a special replay included in the replay GR11 can be performed.

  In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may be configured not to execute the pressing order command setting process and not to transmit the pressing order command. With such a configuration, the AT is controlled by the AT. In the state, the advantageous stop order for the player according to the type of the notification target combination can be specified from the winning number included in the second internal winning command, and the sub-control unit 91 determines the advantageous stop order for the player. The notification can be made by the navigation effect, and the load related to the transmission of the pressing order command by the main control unit 41 can be reduced.

  The winning number of the pushing order replay and the winning number of the pushing order bell only need to be set in a continuous numerical range, and the first numerical range in which the winning number of the pushing order replay is set and the pushing order A configuration in which the second numerical range in which the winning number of the bell is set may be continuous. Even in such a configuration, as in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not the internal lottery result is the notification target role by determining whether the winning number used in performing the predetermined control is the notification target role. Can be determined based on whether or not it is within a predetermined numerical value range assigned to, the process of transmitting the second internal winning command can be simplified.

  Further, in the present embodiment, 1 to 35 are assigned as the winning numbers of the general roles, and the winning numbers of the push order replay as the notification target roles are continuously set in the first numerical range (2 to 13). In the second numerical range (23 to 34), the winning numbers of the push order bells, which are the notification target combinations, are successively set, and the winning numbers of the non-reporting target combinations are set in the first numerical range and the second numerical range. , The winning numbers of all the non-notification target combinations may be successively set in the third numerical range. With such a configuration, a determination is made as to whether or not the internal lottery result is a notification target combination, and a winning number used when performing predetermined control is within a predetermined numerical range assigned to the notification target combination. Since it is possible to determine whether or not the winning number assigned to the non-report target combination is within a predetermined numerical range, it is possible to simplify the process when transmitting the second internal winning command. Can be simplified.

  In the present embodiment, in the internal winning command transmission process, the main control unit 41 determines whether a group of the same type of notification target combination (in this embodiment, a group of the pressing order replay, a The same transmission winning number (in the present embodiment, “2” for the pressing order replay group, and “23” for the pressing order bell group) is set uniformly for each group. Although the second internal winning command including the credit winning number is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91, in the internal winning command transmitting process, the group of the notification target roles to which the same transmission winning number is set is at least Regardless of whether the AT is controlled or not, when the internal lottery result becomes the notification target role, it can be specified that the notification target role has been won. For a group of the same type of notification target role of the same type as a lottery target in one game state, a plurality of groups are set so that each group includes one advantageous role for the player. It is good also as composition which divides into a group and sets a different transmission winning number for every divided group. This allows the sub-control unit 91 to specify whether a notification target role belonging to any one of the plurality of groups has been won, and to perform an effect corresponding to the specified group.

  Next, a main lottery-related process in which the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes a lottery based on random numbers such as an internal lottery and an extra lottery at the start of a game will be described with reference to FIGS.

  The main control unit 41 according to the present embodiment is activated when power supply to the slot machine 1 is started, and after performing an initial setting process, performs a process step by step in accordance with the progress of the game for each game unit. Execute the main processing. In the main process, the game is started when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, and based on the random number value for the internal lottery latched at the same time as the start of the game by the detection of the operation of the start switch 7. To perform main lottery-related processing for performing processing such as lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 37, in the main lottery-related processing, first, the game state (RT0 to RT4) when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected is acquired by referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, and the acquired game state is acquired. Is set in another predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a gaming state for internal lottery (Si01). Then, an internal lottery process (internal lottery) for performing an internal lottery based on the internal lottery gaming state set in the step of Si01 is executed (Si02). In the internal lottery process, as described later, it is determined whether or not each winning combination has been won based on the random number value for the internal lottery, using the determination value (see FIGS. 19 to 21) corresponding to the gaming state for the internal lottery. In accordance with the result of the determination, a winning number (see FIG. 28) capable of specifying the winning combination or the fact that none of the winning combinations has been won (losing) is set in a predetermined winning number area of the RAM 41c. Then, the process returns to the main lottery-related processing.

  After returning from the internal lottery process (internal lottery) to the main lottery-related process in the step of Si02, the winning number set by the internal lottery process is copied to a predetermined area other than the area for the winning number in the RAM 41c and backed up. (Si03).

  Thereafter, referring to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, it is determined whether or not the gaming state (RT0 to RT4) acquired in step Si01, that is, the gaming state when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected is RT0 or RT1. Is determined (Si04). If it is determined in step Si04 that the gaming state (RT0-4) is RT0 or RT1, the internal lottery gaming state set in step Si01 is changed to RT2 (Si05). Then, the internal lottery process (second lottery) is executed again (Si06). In the internal lottery process (second lottery), as in the internal lottery of Si02, the winning combination or none of the combinations is determined by using the determination value corresponding to RT2 (see FIGS. 19 to 21) ( The result is determined, a winning number (see FIG. 28) capable of specifying the result is set in the winning number area of the RAM 41c, and the process returns to the main lottery-related processing.

  Thereby, when the game state (RT0 to RT4) when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected is RT0 or RT1, the game state (RT0 to 4) when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. , And a second lottery when the gaming state is RT2.

  Note that the internal lottery process executed for performing the internal lottery in Si02 and the internal lottery process executed for performing the second lottery in the step of Si06 are processes performed by the same module program included in the game program. It is. The winning number specified by the internal lottery process (internal lottery) and the internal lottery process (second lottery) is set in the same winning number area of the RAM 41c in any process. By performing the process (second lottery), the data set in the winning number area of the RAM 41c is reset to the winning number specified by the second lottery.

  After returning from the internal lottery process (second lottery) to the main lottery-related process in the step of Si06, or when it is determined in the step of Si04 that the gaming state (RT0-4) is not RT0 or RT1, the step of Si07 Then, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the AT, that is, it is controlled by the AT, and whether or not the navigation notification is performed. If it is determined that the vehicle is in the AT, the control state relating to the ART is determined. Is in the ART or additional state (Si08, Si09).

  If the control state of the ART is determined to be ART in step Si08, the process proceeds to step Si13, and based on the winning number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a result of the second lottery in step Si06. Then, it is determined whether or not a lottery target role (strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell) of the additional lottery during the ART has been won. In the step of Si13, if it is determined that any of the lottery target combinations has been won, an additional lottery process is executed (Si14), and the remaining game number of the ART is determined based on the probability according to the type of the winning combination. It is determined whether or not to add the game and the number of games to be added. After executing the additional lottery in the step of Si14, or when it is determined in the step of Si13 that the lottery target role of the additional lottery has not been won, the control state of the ART is maintained (Si15), and the step of Si16 is performed. move on.

  In the internal lottery, the determination values of the strong cherry, the weak cherry, the watermelon, and the common bell among the lottery targets of the additional lottery are set to the same value regardless of the gaming state (see FIGS. 19 to 21). In the step of Si05, the gaming state for the internal lottery is changed to RT2, the second lottery is performed, and even if the additional lottery is performed based on the winning number based on the result, the internal lottery is actually performed in the additional lottery. This is the same as the case where an additional lottery is performed based on the winning number resulting from the above.

  In the step of Si08, it is determined that the control state of the ART is not the ART, and in the step of Si09, it is determined that the control state relating to the ART is being added, the process proceeds to the step of Si10, and the second lottery of the step of Si06 is performed. As a result, based on the winning number set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, whether or not the lottery target role (strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, common bell, replay GR21, replay GR22) in the additional lottery in the additional state is won. Is determined. If it is determined in the step of Si10 that any of the lottery targets has been won, the process proceeds to the step of Si14, and an additional lottery process is executed. After performing the additional lottery in the step of Si14, the control state of the ART is maintained (Si15), and the process proceeds to the step of Si16.

  If it is determined in the step of Si10 that none of the lottery target roles has been won, the promotion replay is performed based on the winning number set in the predetermined area of the RAM 41c as a result of the second lottery of the step of Si06. It is determined whether or not has been won (Si11). If it is determined in step S11 that the promotion replay has not been won, the process proceeds to step S15, and the control state of the ART is maintained, and the process proceeds to step S16. On the other hand, if it is determined that the promotion replay has been won in the step of Si11, the control state of the ART is set to ART (Si12), thereby terminating the additional state and proceeding to the step of Si16.

  If it is determined in step Si07 that the AT is not in the AT state, if it is determined that the control state relating to the ART is not in the added state in the step of Si09, after the control state of the ART is set to ART in the step of Si12, or in the step of Si15, After the control state of the ART is set to be maintained, the winning number backed up in a predetermined separate area of the RAM 41c at the step of Si03, that is, the winning number specified by the internal lottery process (internal lottery) of Si02 is replaced with the winning number of the RAM 41c. Area is reset (Si16), the main lottery-related processing is terminated, and the processing returns to the main processing.

  In this embodiment, when the special role is won and the system shifts to RT4, the control of the AT is interrupted and the navigation is not notified. After the special role is won, the special role is won. In the case of RT3, which is shifted after the bonus controlled via the control, the control of the AT is restarted at the time when the outcome of the shift is stopped and the process shifts to RT1, that is, when the gaming state is RT3, RT4, Since the control of the AT is not performed, if the game state at the start of the game is RT3 or RT4, it is determined that the AT is not in the step of Si07, and the processing related to the additional lottery (steps of Si08 to Si15) Is performed, the process proceeds to the step of Si16.

  As described above, in the main lottery-related processing of the present embodiment, regardless of the game state (RT0 to RT4) when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, the game state (RT0 to 4) when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. The internal lottery based on RT0-4) is executed. Further, when the gaming state (RT0 to RT4) when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected is RT0 or RT1, the gaming state regardless of the gaming state when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. Is set to RT2, a second lottery is executed. When the control state related to the ART is the additional state, the additional lottery is performed based on the winning number specified by the internal lottery or the second lottery with the gaming state being RT2. If the control state related to the ART is the added state, it is determined whether or not the promotion replay has been won based on the winning number specified by the internal lottery or the second lottery in which the gaming state is RT2, and the promotion is performed. When the replay has not been won, the added state is controlled to be continued, while when the promotion replay has been won, the added lottery is controlled to be terminated.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls the additional state as described above, and when the gaming state is RT2, it is determined that the promotion replay has been won by the internal lottery based on RT2. Until the game state is shifted to a state other than RT2 due to an erroneous operation of the player when the game state is controlled to the state of addition, the game state is returned to RT2. In such a configuration, the navigation notification is performed when a predetermined notification target is won. In such a configuration, if the state is controlled to be added, it is determined whether or not to add an additional number of ART games as a privilege based on the fact that the replay GRs 21 and 22 have been won by the internal lottery. In such a case, it is determined whether or not the additional condition is established based on the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the game state other than the game state RT2 when the additional state is normally controlled. On the other hand, if the gaming state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2 after performing the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs the second lottery with the gaming state as RT2. When the state is controlled to be added, an additional lottery is performed based on the fact that the replay GR21 or 22 has won in the internal lottery or the second lottery performed as RT2, and an additional number of ART games is given as a privilege. It is supposed to.

  Further, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls the additional state as described above, and when the gaming state is RT2, it is determined that the promotion replay has been won by the internal lottery based on RT2. Until the game state is shifted to a state other than RT2 due to an erroneous operation of the player when the game state is controlled to the state of addition, the game state is returned to RT2. In such a configuration, the navigation notification is performed when a predetermined notification target is won. In such a configuration, although the state is controlled to be added, after the game state has shifted to a state other than RT2, it is determined whether or not the promotion replay, which is the termination condition of the added state, based on the result of the internal lottery has been won. Is determined based on the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the gaming state other than the gaming state RT2 when the addition state is controlled normally, and it is determined whether or not the termination condition of the additional state is satisfied. Will be lost. On the other hand, if the gaming state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2 after performing the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment performs the second lottery with the gaming state as RT2. When the state is controlled to be in the added state, it is determined whether to end the added state based on the fact that the promotion replay has been won in the internal lottery or the second lottery performed as RT2.

  Next, the control content of the internal lottery process executed in the main lottery-related process by the main control unit 41 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 38, in the internal lottery process, first, a game state for internal lottery is acquired with reference to a predetermined area of the RAM 41c (Sj01), and the initial value of the lottery target combination corresponding to the game state is stored in the RAM 41c. (Sj02). Thereafter, a random number value for internal lottery latched when the start switch 7 is detected is obtained and set in the random number value area of the RAM 41c (Sj03).

  Then, the determination value of the lottery target combination is acquired based on the internal lottery table (see FIGS. 19 to 21) (Sj04), and the acquired determination value is added to the value of the random number value area of the RAM 41c (Sj05). It is determined whether the result, that is, the value of the random number area after the addition of the determination value has overflowed (Sj06).

  In the step Sj06, when it is determined that the addition result does not overflow, the determination value is added for all the lottery target combinations corresponding to the gaming state, and it is determined whether the addition result overflows. Is determined (Sj07). If it is determined in step Sj07 that all lottery target combinations have not been determined, the lottery target role is updated (Sj08), the process returns to step Sj04, and the remaining lottery target roles are determined. By adding the determination value according to the lottery target combination to the value of the random number value area, control for determining whether or not the addition result overflows is repeatedly executed.

  If it is determined in step Sj06 that the addition result has overflowed, the process proceeds to step Sj10, in which the winning number corresponding to the lottery target combination when the addition result overflows is acquired, and the winning number is stored in the RAM 41c in a predetermined manner. Set to area. On the other hand, if it is determined in step Sj06 that all the lottery targets have been determined in step Sj07 without determining that the addition result has overflowed, the process proceeds to step Sj09, and the winning number is determined to be incorrect. "0" is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c.

  In step Sj09 or step Sj10, after the winning number is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process returns to the main lottery-related process.

  As described above, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, before the internal lottery process is called, the internal lottery game state set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c in advance and the internal state latched when the start switch 7 is detected. The winning combination of the internal lottery is specified based on the random number value for the lottery, and a winning number capable of specifying the winning combination is set in a winning number area of the RAM 41c.

  Next, when the control state relating to the ART is the added state, the stop mode when the main control unit 41 stops the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R and the effect mode of the effect performed by the sub-control unit 91 are described with reference to FIGS. This will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (a), at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 sends a game state command capable of specifying the game state and an ART state command capable of specifying the control state relating to the ART to the sub control unit 91. Send. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 specifies that the gaming state is RT2 based on the gaming state command, and specifies that the control state related to ART is the added state based on the ART state command. In this case, the effect mode of the liquid crystal display 51 or the like is controlled to the effect mode of the additional state (in the present embodiment, a message indicating the additional state is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51).

  Further, at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 transmits an internal winning command capable of specifying the result of the internal lottery to the sub-control unit 91, and the additional lottery is performed according to the result of the internal lottery or the second lottery. In the case of being touched, an ART lottery result command capable of specifying the result of the additional lottery is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. On the other hand, when the control state relating to the ART is the additional state, the sub-control unit 91 determines that one of the replays GR21 to GR23 has been won based on the internal winning command. Of the replay GR21 and the replay GR22, which are the lottery targets of the game, an additional lottery suggestion effect that indicates the winning of the replay GR21 and the replay GR22 is executed. In the additional lottery suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 39 (a), by performing a stop operation in a predetermined stop order (in this embodiment, the stop order of right, middle, and left), a replay of seven reds and a replay of seven blues are performed. An image (in this embodiment, an image of “red 7”, “blue 7”, an arrow pointing to the left) indicating that the player can win a prize is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the replay of the red 7 in the predetermined stop order is performed. The user is prompted to perform a stop operation at a timing at which replays of Blue 7 can be completed.

  Thereafter, when the player performs the stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the main control unit 41 performs the reel operation in the stop mode according to the result of the internal lottery and the stop operation as illustrated in FIGS. Control is performed to stop 2L, 2C, and 2R.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), when the replay GR21 has been won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 performs a stop operation at a timing when the seven replays in red can be aligned in the stop order of right, middle, and left. When this is done, the reels are controlled to stop so that the combination of the seven red replay symbols on the winning line LN is stopped, and the symbol combination of “red 7-red 7-red 7” is displayed on the invalid line LM2. Align. At the time of winning the replays GR21 and GR22 in which the red seven-matched replay can win, an additional lottery is executed, and the number of ART games is always added. Is stopped, the main control unit 41 notifies that the vehicle has been added.

  On the other hand, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the sub-control unit 91 executes an additional suggestion effect indicating the result of the additional lottery in the game. In the additional indication effect, the effect is received at the start of the game by controlling the effect mode to the notification mode 1 (in the present embodiment, the mode of displaying the character “+ 100G !!” indicating the number of additional ART games). The number of additional games specified based on the ART lottery result command is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify the result of the additional lottery.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 39 (c), when the replay GR22 has been won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 performs the replay with seven reds and the seven blues in a stop order of right, middle, and left. When the stop operation is performed at the timing when the match can be made and when the blue 7 match replay can be made, the reels are controlled to stop so that the combination of the blue 7 match replay symbols stops on the winning line LN, and the invalid line LM4 is set. Align the combination of blue 7-blue 7-blue 7 symbols. Further, when the stop operation is performed at a timing when only the seven red replays can be aligned in the right middle left stop order, each reel is controlled to stop so that the combination of the seven red replay symbols stops on the winning line LN. Then, the combination of the symbols "red 7-red 7-red 7" is aligned with the invalid line LM2. At the time of winning the replays GR21 and GR22 in which the blue seven-matched replay and the red seven-matched replay can win, an additional lottery is executed, and the number of ART games is always added. The stop of the combination of the replay or the replay of the blue 7-set replay causes the main control unit 41 to notify that the player has added the symbol.

  On the other hand, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the sub-control unit 91 executes an additional suggestion effect, and notifies the effect mode in the notification mode 1 (the book mode) in the same manner as in the case where the red seven-match replay wins. In this embodiment, the result of the additional lottery is notified by the liquid crystal display 51 by controlling the display mode to display “+ 300G !!” indicating the number of additional games of the ART.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 40B, when the replay GRs 21 and 22 have been won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 configures a replay of seven reds and a seven replay of blue in the stop order in the middle right. After the stop operation is performed at a timing at which the symbol to be stopped can be stopped, the stop operation is performed at a timing at which the symbols constituting the replay of red 7 and the replay of blue 7 can be stopped for the left reel, so that the red 7 is aligned. When the replay and the blue seven-match replay are missed, the reels are controlled to stop so that the combination of the symbols of the missed replay a is missed on the payline LN. Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (c), when the replay GRs 21 and 22 are won in the internal lottery, when a stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the right middle left stop order, the right middle left Even in the stop order, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the seven red replays and the blue seven replays cannot be aligned at the first stop, each reel is stopped so that the combination of the symbols of the middle replay stops on the winning line LN. Stop control.

  On the other hand, when the replay GRs 21 and 22 are won in the internal lottery, the sub-control unit 91 determines that all the reels 2L, 2C, When the 2R is stopped, an additional suggestion effect is executed, and the effect mode is displayed in a notification mode 2 different from the notification mode 1 (in the present embodiment, characters of “+ 300G” indicating the number of additional games in the ART are displayed. In this case, the result of the additional lottery is notified by the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (b), when the replay GR23 has been won in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41 configures a replay of seven reds and a replay of seven blues in the stop order of right, middle, and right. When a stop operation is performed at a timing when the symbol can stop at the pay line LN, the reels are controlled to stop so that the combination of the symbols of the replay b which are missed in the pay line LN and stopped. When the replay GR23 has been won in the internal lottery, a stop operation is performed at a timing at which it is impossible to stop the symbols constituting the seven replays arranged in red and the seven replays arranged in blue in the winning order LN in the stop order from right to right. When a stop operation is performed in a stop order other than the right-center-right stop order, the reels are controlled to stop so that the combination of the symbols in the middle replay stops on the pay line LN (not shown).

  On the other hand, when the replay GR23 has been won in the internal lottery, the sub-control unit 91 executes a no-addition effect effect when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, and indicates that no additional has been performed. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  As described above, when the control state related to the ART is the additional state, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls the additional state by winning a predetermined combination (promotion replay) in the second lottery. Terminate. On the other hand, when the predetermined role (promotion replay) is won in the second lottery on the main control unit 41 side and the additional state may be ended, the sub-control unit 91 controls the additional state. Perform an end possibility suggestion effect indicating that there is a possibility of being terminated. In addition, although there is no possibility that the additional state is ended on the main control unit 41 side, when the normal replay is won in the internal lottery and the fake effect lottery is won, the fake end possibility suggestion effect is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (a), when the promotion replay is won as a predetermined combination in the internal lottery, the main control unit 41, together with the game state command and the ART state command, starts the game at the start of the game. An internal winning command that can specify that the role (promotion replay) has been won is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. On the other hand, when it is determined that the gaming state is RT2 and the control state relating to the ART is the added state based on the gaming state command and the ART state command, the sub-control unit 91 displays the liquid crystal display 51. In the case where it is specified that a predetermined combination (promotion replay) has been won based on the internal winning command, an end possibility suggestion effect is executed. In the end possibility suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 42A, an image indicating a combination of symbols of a predetermined combination (promotional replay), and the predetermined combination is stopped when the predetermined combination stops on the payline LN, and the additional state is added. A message indicating that the control is terminated is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the main control unit 41 stops the combination of the symbols of the promotion replay on the payline LN, as shown in FIG. To stop the reels. On the other hand, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the sub-control unit 91 executes an additional state end notification effect, and displays an image indicating that control of the additional state is ended. A display is made on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify the end of the added state.

  Further, when it is specified that the control state of the ART is the added state based on the ART state command, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the normal replay has been won based on the internal winning command. When a false effect lottery is executed and the lottery is won, a false end possibility suggestion effect is executed. In the false end possibility suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), an image or the like similar to the end possibility suggestion effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to indicate the possibility that the control of the added state is ended. I do.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (c), when the player performs a stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the main control unit 41 stops the combination of the symbols in the middle replay on the payline LN. To stop the reels. On the other hand, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the sub control unit 91 causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display an image indicating that the control of the added state is continued without being terminated. , The continuation of the added state is notified.

  As described above, when the game state is RT2 and the control state related to ART is the added state, the sub-control unit 91 of this embodiment controls the effected state of the liquid crystal display 51 or the like to the added state. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43 (a), in the case where the gaming state is a state other than RT2, that is, in the additional state, although the control state relating to the ART is not shifted from the additional state to the ART state, During the period in which the game state is shifted from RT2 to RT0 or RT1 due to an incorrect operation procedure of the player and the game state is controlled so as to return to RT2, an effect mode using the liquid crystal display 51 or the like. Is a state in which the player can recognize that the game state is an additional state and that the gaming state is an additional state different from the normal additional state of RT2. In this example, a plus state on the liquid crystal display 51, and controls the) to display a message indicating that prepare promoted again RT2.

  The main control unit 41 executes an internal lottery (second lottery) based on RT2 when the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT2 and the control state relating to ART is an additional state, and the game is played. At the start, an internal winning command and a second lottery-related command are transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. If an additional lottery is performed according to the result of the internal winning (second lottery), the result of the additional lottery is performed. Is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. On the other hand, when it is specified that the additional lottery has been performed based on the ART lottery result command when the control state relating to the ART is the additional state, the sub controller 91 performs the additional lottery. Perform an additional possibility suggestion effect that indicates the possibility As shown in FIG. 43 (a), in the effect of indicating the possibility of addition, the liquid crystal display 51 displays an image (in this embodiment, the character of “chance!”) Indicating the possibility of the addition lottery.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the main control unit 41 obtains the result of the internal lottery as shown in FIGS. 43 (b), (c) and 44 (b). The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are controlled to be stopped in a stop mode according to the stop operation.

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 43B and 43C, when the replay GRs 21 and 22 are won in the second lottery, the main control unit 41 does not win any role in the internal lottery. The respective reels are controlled to stop so as not to stop any combination of symbols in the winning line LN but to stop a streak, and to stop each reel. On the other hand, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the sub-control unit 91 executes an additional suggestion effect indicating the result of the additional lottery in the game. In the additional indication effect, the notification mode 2 (in the present embodiment, the characters “+ 100G” and “+ 300G” indicating the additional number of ART games) are the same as in the case where the replay of red 7 and the replay of blue 7 are missed. By controlling the display mode, the liquid crystal display 51 notifies the result of the additional lottery. The number of additional games specified based on the ART lottery result command received at the start of the game is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, thereby notifying the result of the additional lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (a), when the replay GR23 is won as a predetermined combination in the second lottery, the main control unit 41 sets the predetermined state together with the game state command and the ART state command at the start of the game. A second lottery-related command capable of specifying that the winning combination (replay GR23) has been won is transmitted to the sub control unit 91. On the other hand, when it is specified that the game state is not RT2 and the control state related to ART is the additional state based on the game state command and the ART state command, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the second lottery-related When it is specified that the predetermined combination (replay GR23) has been won based on the command, a false addition suggestion effect is executed. In the false addition suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), an image or the like similar to the addition suggestion effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to indicate the possibility of an additional lottery.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the main control unit 41 stops the symbol to be a miss on the pay line LN as shown in FIG. Stop control of each reel. On the other hand, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the sub control unit 91 causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display an image indicating that the additional lottery has not been performed.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), when the control state related to the ART is the added state, but the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT2, the main controller 41 is promoted as a predetermined combination in the second lottery. When the replay is won, at the start of the game, a second lottery-related command capable of specifying that the predetermined combination (promotional replay) has been won is sent to the sub control unit 91 together with the gaming state command and the ART state command. To send. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 91 determines, based on the gaming state command and the ART state command, that the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT2 and the control state relating to the ART is an additional state, In a case where it is determined that the effect mode by the liquid crystal display 51 or the like is in an added state, the effect mode is recognizable, and when it is specified that the predetermined role (promotion replay) has been won based on the second lottery-related command, Perform the end possibility suggestion effect. In the end possibility suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 45A, an image (in this embodiment, the character “Pinch !!”) indicating the possibility that the control of the added state is ended is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. To be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the main control unit 41 causes the symbol to be a stop to be stopped on the winning line LN as shown in FIG. 45B. Stop control of each reel. On the other hand, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the sub-control unit 91 executes the additional state end notification effect in the same manner as when the promotion replay wins when the gaming state is RT2. Then, an image indicating that the control of the added state is ended is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify the end of the added state.

  In addition, the sub-control unit 91 determines that the control state of the ART is the added state based on the ART state command, and that the gaming state is a gaming state other than RT2 based on the gaming state command. In the case where it is specified, when it is specified that the normal replay has been won in the second lottery based on the second lottery-related command, the fake production lottery is executed, and if the lottery is won, a false end can be performed. Perform gender suggestive effects. In the false end possibility suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), an image or the like similar to the end possibility suggestion effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to indicate the possibility that the control of the added state is ended. I do.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (c), when the player performs a stop operation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R, the main control unit 41 stops the symbol to be a miss on the payline LN. Stop control of each reel. On the other hand, when all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped, the sub control unit 91 displays an image (in the present embodiment, " Is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 to notify the user of the continuation of the additional state.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 can specify whether the replay GR23 and the promotion replay have been won as the predetermined combination in the second lottery performed again based on the first game state (RT2). A second lottery-related command is transmitted to the sub-control unit 91. The second lottery-related command includes information that can specify whether or not the predetermined combination has won in the second lottery. For example, the information may include information indicating the winning or non-winning of the predetermined role in the second lottery, or the winning number may be used as the result of the second lottery, such as an internal winning command. May be included. In a configuration in which a winning number is included as a lottery result of the second lottery like an internal winning command, a role other than the predetermined role, particularly a pressing order bell and a pressing order replay, as in the second internal winning command, By preventing the operation mode advantageous to the player from being specified, the sub control unit 91 specifies the operation mode advantageous to the player according to the internal lottery result from the second lottery-related command. There is no.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the control state related to the ART is the added state, and the promotion replay that triggers the end of the added state as a predetermined combination in the second lottery is won, The sub-control unit 91 transmits a second lottery-related command that can specify that the promotion replay has been won, and specifies that the promotion replay has been won in the second lottery based on the second lottery-related command during the additional state. In this case, the additional state ending notification effect is executed in this case. However, a command including information that can specify that the additional state is to be ended may be transmitted as the second lottery-related command. In such a configuration, the second lottery-related command may be configured to include information indicating the end of the additional state directly as information that can specify that the additional state is to be ended, or to the internal lottery (internal It includes information on the control state of the ART updated according to the lottery result of the lottery and the second lottery, and includes information that can specify that the additional state has been completed based on the history of the information over a plurality of games. A configuration may be used.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment controls the AT to notify the player of the pushing order that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state (RT0, RT2) in which the winning probability of the replaying role (normal replay, pushing order replay) is higher than usual. It is possible to control both the AT and the RT0 in the ART and the AT and the RT2 in the added state. In the added state, the special state can be selected only in the added state. When the replaying role (red 7-matched replay, blue 7-matched replay, missed replay a) is won, the number of games controlled by the ART is added.

  In such a configuration, during the period in which both the AT and the predetermined RT are controlled, the end condition of the period in which both the AT and the predetermined RT are controlled is satisfied by performing an operation in accordance with the notified pressing order. If the player operates in a different pressing order from the notified pressing order, the end condition of the period for controlling both the AT and the predetermined RT is satisfied. If the configuration is such that the predetermined RT ends even if it is not performed, not only does the predetermined RT end, but also the special re-playing role is not a lottery target due to the end of the predetermined RT, and it becomes impossible to win. Therefore, an opportunity to increase the number of games controlled by the ART is also lost, and the disadvantage for the player may be significantly increased.

  On the other hand, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has the same probability of winning a predetermined role (small role), but has a specific role (seven replays in red, seven replays in blue, replay a missing part a). Is controlled to a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state and a second gaming state having different winning probabilities, and a predetermined probability is determined according to a gaming state at the time of starting the game. Performing an internal lottery for deciding whether or not to allow a winning of a role, controlling an additional state as a specific control, and controlling the additional state as a specific control, ART is advantageous as an advantage for the player. In the case where the game is added to the number of games, it is possible to provide an additional state as the specific control, and when the game is controlled to the second game state (RT0, RT1) at the start of the game, 1 game The second lottery can be performed again based on the state (RT2), the additional state control is performed as specific control, and the state is controlled to the first game state (RT2) at the start of the game. , The number of ART games is given based on the fact that a specific winning combination has been won in the internal lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2), the additional state control is performed as specific control, and When controlling to the second gaming state (RT0 or RT1) at the start, regardless of whether or not a predetermined combination (small combination, etc.) has been won in the internal lottery based on the second gaming state. The second lottery is performed based on the first gaming state (RT2), and the number of ART games is given based on the fact that a specific winning combination has been won in the second lottery. But in a gaming state other than RT2 Even if the game state is controlled, the additional number of ART games is given based on the fact that a specific combination has been won in the second lottery when the gaming state is set to RT2. Regardless of whether the game state is controlled to the game state or the second game state, the determination regarding the addition of the ART game as a privilege is made under the same condition, and the profit of the player greatly changes. Can be prevented.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the game is in the second game state (RT0, RT1) at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 determines the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the game state at the start of the game, Regardless of whether it is a predetermined combination (such as a small combination) whose probability of being determined does not change regardless of whether it is the first gaming state (RT2) or the second gaming state (RT0, RT1), Since the second lottery based on the first game state (RT2) is performed, when the game state at the start of the game is the second game state, the second internal lottery based on the first game state is performed before the second lottery is performed. Since it is not necessary to consider the lottery result of the lottery, it is possible to reduce the program capacity when performing the second lottery based on the first game state.

  In the present embodiment, when the main control unit 41 controls the additional state as the specific control and controls the first game state (RT2) at the time of starting the game, the main control unit 41 performs the first game state (RT2). In the internal lottery based on the gaming state (RT2), the number of ART games is given based on the fact that a specific winning combination has been won, while the additional state control is being performed as specific control, and at the start of the game. When controlling to the second gaming state (RT0, RT1), a second lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2) is performed, and a particular role is won in the second lottery. The number of ART games is given based on the above. However, when the additional state control is performed as the specific control, any one of the first game state (RT2) and the second game state (RT0, RT1) is used. Regardless of the state of Performing a second lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2), specific role in the second drawing may be configured to impart a game number of ART Based upon the elected. Even in such a configuration, the control of the added state is executed, but when the game is controlled to the second game state (RT0, RT1) other than the first game state (RT2), the game is performed. In the case where the state is set to the first gaming state (RT2), an additional game number of ART is given based on the fact that a specific combination has been won in the second lottery, so that the first gaming state is controlled. Irrespective of whether the game is being played or controlled to the second game state, a decision is made regarding the addition of the ART game as an extra under the same conditions, thereby preventing the player's profit from significantly changing. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41, based on the fact that the specific combination has been won in the second lottery based on the first game state (RT2), while controlling the additional state as the specific control, A configuration in which an additional number of ART games is given as an advantage for the player, that is, a period in which the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state as an advantage for the player is provided. The right to be able to shift to an advantageous state for the player (such as winning a lottery that determines whether or not to generate an advantageous state, allowing a prize to be shifted to an advantageous state, etc.), The right to be notified of an advantageous operation mode, the right to be controlled to a gaming state in which an expected value to which a gaming value is given is high, and whether or not the current gaming state is a gaming state advantageous to the player. Rights that may be directly advantageous to the player, such as the right to be granted, or not directly advantageous to the player. It may be an indirectly advantageous privilege. Further, the period (the number of games) that is controlled to the advantageous state given as an advantage to the player may be varied in length according to the result of a predetermined lottery or the like, or may be fixed game. It may be an average value of the number or the number of games that fluctuates depending on the termination condition.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the first gaming state (RT2), while a predetermined re-gaming role (seven replays in red, seven replays in blue, replay a without drop-out a) is a lottery target as a specific role, In the second gaming state (RT0, RT1), the predetermined re-gaming combination is not set as a lottery target, so that the first gaming state and the second gaming state are changed to the predetermined re-gaming combination (red 7s). In this configuration, the replay, the blue seven-matched replay, and the missing replay a) are configured to have a gaming state in which the probability of winning is different, but the first gaming state and the second gaming state are defined as a predetermined re-gaming role (red seven-matched replay). , Blue 7-matched replays, and missing replays a) may have different winning probabilities. In both the first gaming state and the second gaming state, a predetermined re-gaming role is a lottery target. The gamer Probability to be selected may be different configuration.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to give the number of ART games based on the fact that a specific winning combination has been won in the second lottery, and the specific replaying role (red 7-matched replay, blue 7-matched replay, and missed replay a) are applied. However, the specific role that is given a privilege by winning in the second lottery is not limited to the replaying role, A small combination with payout of medals, or a combination of predetermined symbols without payout of medals or addition of replays, for example, a transition roll or the like may be used.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls the additional state, and the replay GRs 21 and 22 are won as a specific combination in the internal lottery based on the RT2 or the second lottery, so that the ART is given as a privilege. In this configuration, an additional number of games is added, and a specific combination is given as a privilege to be won by performing a stop operation in a predetermined operation mode. The configuration may be such that the additional number of games is added. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 controls the additional state, and the gaming state at the start of the game is the first gaming state (RT2). There is a specific winning combination in the internal lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2), and a stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode, so that a special combination is won based on the winning of the specific combination. The game state at the start of the game is the second game state (RT0, RT1) while the additional game number of the ART is given, and a specific combination in the second lottery based on the first game state (RT2) is given. In the case where the winning is achieved, when all reels are stopped, an additional game number of ART is given as a privilege based on the stop operation being performed in a predetermined operation mode. It is possible to prevent the profit of the person from changing significantly.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls the additional state as the specific control, and always gives the number of ART games as a privilege when a specific combination is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery. However, when a specific combination is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the number of ART games may be given as a privilege. Based on the fact that a specific role has been won in the lottery or the second lottery, or that a stop operation has been performed in the stop order corresponding to the specific role, whether to add an additional number of ART games as a privilege. A draw that determines whether or not and the number of games to be given, etc., is performed, and the number of games of the ART won in the draw is given as a privilege, or a specific role is won in the internal draw or the second draw. Every time Equal a predetermined number of points assigned depending on the sum of the point it may be configured such that imparts plus the number of games the ART as a benefit by reaching a predetermined number.

  In the present embodiment, when the game state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2 at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 performs the second lottery with the game state being RT2, and in the second lottery, the internal lottery is performed. In the same manner as described above, it is determined whether or not all the lottery targets including a specific combination have been won according to the gaming state, and the winning number of the determined winning combination is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. However, when performing the second lottery with the gaming state being RT2, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not only a specific role has been won. As a configuration in which the winning information capable of specifying the type of the winning combination is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the winning state of the specific winning role may be specified based on the winning information in the control of the added state. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load on the main control unit 41 when determining a specific combination.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the main lottery-related process, the main lottery-related process is performed when the game state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2 at the start of the game, regardless of whether the game state is controlled to be added. It is a configuration in which the second lottery is performed with the gaming state being RT2 and it is determined whether or not the specific combination is won. If it is determined that the game state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2 at the start of the game, the game state may be set to RT2 and the second lottery may be performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load on the main control unit 41 in a state where the control is not performed in the additional state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the control of the added state is applied as the specific control performed by the main control unit 41. The main control unit 41 performs the control when the game state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2 at the start of the game. When the second lottery is performed as RT2 and the additional control is performed as the specific control, the number of ART games is added as a privilege based on the fact that a specific role is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery. However, in a configuration (including a configuration in which only one is won) in which the winning probability of a specific role for which a privilege is provided during ART is different between RT0 and RT1 (including a configuration in which only one is won), the main control unit 41 A configuration in which ART control is applied as the specific control to be performed may be adopted. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 sets the RT in which the game state is controlled to ART at the start of the game. In the case of RT1 other than the above, the second lottery based on the winning probability of RT0 is performed, and when the specific control is performed by the ART as the specific control, the privilege based on the specific role being won in the second lottery is obtained. It is possible to prevent the player's profit from greatly changing by controlling the game to be in the added state or adding the added number of ART games.

  In the main lottery process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment acquires the game state at the start of the game, sets the acquired game state as the internal lottery game state, and executes the internal lottery process. It is possible to perform an internal lottery based on the gaming state at the start of the game, and after performing the internal lottery, set the first gaming state (RT2) to a gaming state for the internal lottery and perform the internal lottery process. By executing, the second lottery based on the first game state is performed, and the lottery result is determined using the internal lottery process common to the process of performing the internal lottery and the process of performing the second lottery. Therefore, the program capacity for performing the second lottery based on the first game state can be reduced.

  In the main lottery process, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment executes a process of performing an internal lottery based on a game state at the start of a game, and then performs a second lottery based on a first game state (RT2). After executing the process of performing an internal lottery, the result of the internal lottery is a result of the lottery, and the winning number specified by the process is backed up in a predetermined area other than the area for the winning number in the RAM 41c, After that, since the process of performing the second lottery is executed, it is possible to prevent the result of the internal lottery from being spoiled in executing the process of performing the second lottery.

  At the start of the game, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the gaming state to the first gaming state (RT2), and performs a specific combination (red 7s) in an internal lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2). When a replay, a blue 7-matched replay, and a drop-out replay a) are won, the game is stopped in a specific operation mode (a stop order of right, middle, and left, and a red 7-matched replay and a blue 7-matched replay can be stopped at the payline LN). When an operation is performed, control is performed to stop a specific combination of symbols (a combination of seven replays of red and a combination of seven replays of blue) on the payline LN, and an operation mode other than the specific operation mode (for example, left When the stop sequence of the first stop, the stop sequence of the right, center, and left, and the replay of seven reds and the seven replays of blue are operated at the timing at which it is impossible to stop on the winning line LN), symbols other than a specific symbol combination are operated. When the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a specific combination while controlling the combination (combination of symbols of the missing replay a and the symbol of the middle replay) on the payline LN, and controlling the combination to the first game state, When a stop operation is performed in a specific operation mode, a specific combination of symbols (a combination of seven replays in red and a combination of seven replays in blue) is stopped at the winning line by the LN, and the sub control unit 91 is operated. The display of the liquid crystal display 51 as a notification mode 1 displays an image indicating that the specific control is being performed and the privilege is provided, and notifies the user of the provision of the privilege. In the state, when the lottery result of the internal lottery becomes a specific combination and a stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the specific operation mode, the display of the liquid crystal display 51 by the sub control unit 91 is notified to the notification mode. By notifying the award of the special feature as a notification mode 2 different from the first mode, it is notified that the special feature is provided in a different mode from when the specific symbol combination is stopped. When the state is the second gaming state and the lottery result of the second lottery has a specific combination, when the stop operation is performed, the display of the liquid crystal display 51 by the sub-control unit 91 is notified in the second notification mode. When the particular combination is won in the second lottery while controlling to the second gaming state (RT0, RT1), the control is switched to the first gaming state. When a specific combination is won in the internal lottery, when a stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the specific operation mode, that is, when a specific symbol combination (a red seven-match replay, a blue seven-match replay Combination) can be stopped Since it is notified that the privilege is given in a common mode (notification mode 2) when the player does not have the special role, the special role is won in the second lottery in the second gaming state (RT0, RT1). , The discomfort given to the player can be reduced.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment can control the additional state as the specific control, perform the navigation notification in accordance with the lottery result of the internal lottery based on the game state at the start of the game, and perform the additional control as the specific control. If the gaming state is the first gaming state (RT2) while the state control is being executed, the navigation notification is performed when the push order bell and the replay GRs 21 to 23 are won by the internal lottery. In the case where the gaming state is the second gaming state (RT0, RT1), the push order bell and the push order replay (in the case of RT0, replay GR11 to 16; in the case of RT1, replay GR1 in the internal lottery). -6), the navigation notification is performed when the winning is achieved. Since the lottery result for which the navigation notification is performed is different depending on whether the game state is the first game state or the second game state, the current game is performed. State can be recognized whether the second game state or a first game condition.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which different types of navigation notification are performed for the same notification target according to the first gaming state or the second gaming state. Even with such a configuration, the current gaming state may be changed. It is possible to recognize whether the game state is the first game state or the second game state.

  The main control unit 41 of the present embodiment sets the first gaming state (RT2) and the first gaming state (RT2) having the same probability of winning a predetermined role (small role) but different probabilities of winning a special role (promotion replay). Control of a plurality of game states including the second game state (RT0, RT1), and whether to allow a prize to a predetermined combination with a predetermined probability according to the game state at the start of the game. An internal lottery for determining whether or not to perform the determination is performed, and a predetermined condition is established as a specific control so that the number of ART games can be controlled to be in an added state. Control, and when controlling to the first gaming state (RT2) or the second gaming state (RT0, RT1) at the start of the game, the second lottery is performed again based on the first gaming state (RT2). It is possible to do When the control of the added state is performed as the constant control and the game is controlled to the first game state (RT2) at the start of the game, a special is performed in the second lottery based on the first game state (RT2). In the case where the specific control is terminated based on the winning of the winning combination, the additional state control is performed as the specific control, and the second game state (RT0 or RT1) is controlled at the start of the game. The second lottery is performed based on the first gaming state (RT2), and the specific control is terminated based on the fact that a special role has been won in the second lottery. Therefore, the control of the additional state is executed. However, even if the special game is controlled to the second game state (RT0, RT1) having a different probability of winning from the first game state (RT2), the first game is performed by the second lottery. Special with probability in state (RT2) Since the winning of the role is determined and the specific control is terminated based on the winning of the special role, the role is controlled to the first game state or controlled to the second game state. , It is possible to prevent the profit of the player from greatly changing.

  In the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 performs the additional state control as the specific control, and also performs the second game state (RT2) at the start of the game. Even in the case of controlling to the gaming state (RT0, RT1), the second lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2) is performed again, and based on the fact that a special role is won in the second lottery. Although the specific control is terminated, when the additional state control is performed as the specific control and the control is performed in the first gaming state (RT2) at the start of the game, the first gaming state (RT2) is set. Without performing the second lottery again based on (RT2), the specific control is terminated based on the fact that a special role has been won in the internal lottery based on the first game state (RT2) at the start of the game, and the specific Control the added state as control If the game is controlled to the second game state (RT0, RT1) at the start of the game, the second lottery is performed again based on the first game state (RT2), and the second lottery is executed. The specific control may be terminated based on the fact that a special role has been won. Even in such a configuration, the control of the added state is executed, but when the game is controlled to the second game state (RT0, RT1) other than the first game state (RT2), the game is performed. Since the specific control is terminated based on the winning of the special combination in the second lottery when the state is set to the first gaming state (RT2), whether the state is controlled to the first gaming state, The specific control can be ended under the same condition irrespective of whether it is controlled to the second game state, and it is possible to prevent a change in the period of the specific control and a great change in the profit of the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the first gaming state (RT2), while a predetermined re-gaming combination (promotional replay) is a lottery target as a special combination, in the second gaming state (RT0, RT1). The first gaming state and the second gaming state are different in the probability that the predetermined re-gaming role (promotion replay) will be won as a special role by not selecting the predetermined re-gaming role as a lottery target. The first game state and the second game state may have different probabilities of winning a predetermined re-gaming role (promotion replay), and the first game state and the second game state may be different. Even in the second game state, a predetermined re-game combination may be a lottery target as a special combination, and the probability of the predetermined re-game combination being won may be different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 is configured to end the specific control based on the winning of the special combination in the second lottery, and a predetermined re-playing combination (promotion replay) as the specific combination. However, the special role for which the specific control is terminated by winning in the second lottery is not limited to the replaying role, but also a small role with payout of medals, or a payout of medals. Or a combination of predetermined symbols not accompanied by a re-playing combination, for example, a transition outcome.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main control unit 41 controls the extra state, and the promotion replay is won as a special combination in the internal lottery based on the RT2 or the second lottery, thereby the extra state as the specific control. However, even if the special combination is set as a winning combination by performing a stop operation in a predetermined operation mode, the additional state is terminated based on the special combination winning. As such a configuration, the main control unit 41 controls the game in an added state, and the game state at the start of the game is the first game state (RT2), and the first game state (RT2) A special role is won by an internal lottery based on the winning probability, and a stop operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode, thereby terminating the added state based on the winning of the special role, and playing at the start of the game. When the state is the second gaming state (RT0, RT1) and a special role is won in the second lottery based on the winning probability of the first gaming state (RT2), all reels are stopped. At this time, even when the additional state is terminated based on the stop operation being performed in a predetermined operation mode, it is possible to prevent the profit of the player from changing significantly.

  In the present embodiment, when the game state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2 at the start of the game, the main control unit 41 performs the second lottery with the game state being RT2, and in the second lottery, the internal lottery is performed. In the same manner as in the above, it is determined whether or not all the lottery targets including the special combination have been won according to the gaming state, and the winning number of the determined winning combination is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c. However, when performing the second lottery with the game state being RT2, the main control unit 41 determines whether or not only a special role has been won. As a configuration in which the winning information that can specify the type of a winning combination is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 41c, the winning state of a special role may be specified based on the winning information in the control of the added state. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load on the main control unit 41 when a special combination is determined.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the main lottery-related process, the main lottery-related process is performed when the game state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2 at the start of the game, regardless of whether or not the state is controlled to be added. It is configured to determine whether or not a special combination has been won by performing a second lottery with the gaming state as RT2, and determine whether or not to control the additional state, and to control the additional state. If it is determined that the game state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2 at the start of the game, the game state may be set to RT2 and the second lottery may be performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the load on the main control unit 41 in a state where the control is not performed in the additional state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the control of the added state is applied as the specific control performed by the main control unit 41. The main control unit 41 performs the control when the game state is RT0 or RT1 other than RT2 at the start of the game. Is configured to perform a second lottery as RT2 and terminate the control in the additional state based on the fact that a special role is won in the internal lottery or the second lottery when the additional state is controlled as the specific control. However, in a configuration (including a configuration in which only one is won) in which the winning probability of a special role that ends the ART is different between RT0 and RT1, the control of the ART is performed as the specific control performed by the main control unit 41. In such a configuration, the main control unit 41 may determine whether the game state is RT1 other than RT0 controlled by the ART at the start of the game. , The second lottery based on the winning probability of RT0 is performed, and when the ART is controlled as the specific control, the control of the ART is terminated based on the special role being won in the second lottery. This can prevent the profit of the player from changing significantly.

  In this embodiment, the first gaming state (RT2) and the second gaming state (RT0, RT1) have the same probability of winning a predetermined combination (small combination, etc.), and the main control unit 41 Regardless of whether or not a predetermined combination has been won in the internal lottery based on the game state at the start of the game, the first game state is set when the game is controlled to the second game state (RT0, RT1). The second lottery is performed again based on (RT2), and it is determined whether or not a special lottery has been won with a probability according to the first gaming state (RT2). Therefore, the second gaming state (RT0, RT1) In), in performing the second lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2), it is not necessary to consider the result of the internal lottery based on the gaming state at the start of the game. Can be reduced.

  At the start of the game, the main control unit 41 of the present embodiment has a gaming state of a first gaming state (RT2), and a special combination (promotion replay) in an internal lottery based on the first gaming state (RT2). When the player wins, the control of stopping the special combination of symbols (combination of the symbols of the promotion replay) on the winning line LN when the stop operation is performed is performed, and the sub-control unit 91 notifies the addition state completion. While the effect is executed and the effect mode is set as the end notification mode, an image indicating that the specific control is ended is displayed to notify the end of the specific control, and the game state is changed to the second game state ( RT0, RT1), when the gaming state is set to the first gaming state (RT2), the internal lottery is performed again, and a special combination (promotion replay) is won, and when the stop operation is performed, the sub control unit 1 to display an image indicating that the specific control is to be ended and to notify the end of the specific control by setting the effect mode to the end notification mode and informing the end of the specific control, the second game state (RT0 , RT1), when a special role is won in the second lottery based on the first game state, the special game is controlled to the first game state, and the special role is determined in the internal lottery. When the stop operation is performed at the time of winning, that is, when the special combination of symbols (combination of the symbols of the promotion replay) is stopped, it is notified that the specific control is to be ended in a common end notification mode. In the second game state (RT0, RT1), even when the specific control ends due to the special lottery result of the second lottery based on the first game state (RT2), an uncomfortable feeling is given to the player. Reduce That.

  In the present embodiment, in the internal lottery, the promotion replay, which is a special role that triggers the termination of the additional state as the specific control, is one type of role, and when the promotion replay is won, the promotion replay must be performed. For example, as a special combination, a first ending combination indicating the end of the added state and a prize when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the first ending combination cannot be won. In the first gaming state (RT2), a special result in which the first ending role and the second ending role as special roles are simultaneously won is obtained in the first gaming state (RT2). When a special result is won by an internal lottery, the first end combination is performed when a stop operation is performed in a special operation mode (a timing at which the first end combination can be stopped at the payline LN). Winning line L When the operation is performed in an operation mode other than the special operation mode (when the first end combination cannot be stopped at the pay line LN), the second end combination is stopped at the pay line LN. When a special result is won by an internal lottery in the first gaming state (RT2) in the first gaming state (RT2), when a stop operation is performed in a special operation mode, the first ending role is changed to a winning line by LN. In addition to the stop, the sub-control unit 91 executes the additional state end notification effect to notify the end of the specific control (additional state) as the effect state as the end notification mode 1, and includes the first game state ( In RT2), when the special result is won by the internal lottery, when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode other than the special operation mode, the additional control state execution effect is executed by the sub-control unit 91. By notifying the end mode of the specific control (additional state) as an end notification mode 2 different from the end notification mode 1, the effect mode is different from when the first end combination is stopped. The sub-control unit 91 notifies that the specific control (additional state) is finished, and when the special result is won by the second lottery in the second gaming state (RT0, RT1), when the stop operation is performed, The additional state end notification effect is executed, and the effect mode is changed to the end information mode 2, that is, a special result is won by an internal lottery in the first gaming state (RT2), and the second end role is omitted by skipping the first end role. Is notified that the specific control (additional state) is completed in the same manner as when the prize is won, and the special result is won in the second lottery in the second gaming state (RT0, RT1). Even when the fixed control (additional state) is completed, the sense of incongruity given to the player can be reduced.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a range distribution for each of the gaming states 0 to 2 regarding the determination value of each lottery target combination used in the internal lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 46, the determination value range (52421 to 58420) in which the winning order of the push order replay (replay GR11 to 16) is determined in RT0 is arranged within the outlier range (26231 to 65536) in RT1. At the same time, they are arranged in the range of determination values (17261 to 58420) for determining the winning of the normal replay in RT2. In addition, the determination value range (52421 to 58420) in which the winning order of the push order replay (replay GR21 to 23) is determined in RT2 is arranged within the outlier range (26231 to 65536) in RT1 and the outlier in RT0. (58421 to 66536). Further, the determination value range (62837 to 65536) in which the winning of the promotion replay is determined in RT2 is arranged within the outlier range (26231 to 65536) in RT1, and the outlier range (58421 to 66536) in RT0. Is located within.

  As described above, the determination value of the internal lottery of the promotion replay in which the gaming state is shifted by winning in RT2 is the pushing order including the promotion replay in which the gaming state is shifted by winning in RT1. A push order replay (replay) including a special replay and a fall replay that is set to a range that does not overlap with the determination value range of the replays (replays GR1 to GR6), and a game state is shifted by winning at RT0. It is set to a range that does not overlap with the range of the determination values of GR11 to 16).

  By arranging the range of the determination value of the promotion replay in RT2 so as to be different from the range of the determination value of the combination accompanied by the transition of the game state in RT1 and RT0, the promotion state in the second lottery is again determined as the game state of RT2. In this case, the role with the transition of the gaming state at RT1 and RT0 will not be won in the internal lottery based on the gaming state at the start of the game, and the gaming state will be determined only by the promotion replay being won in the second lottery. Can be shifted to RT0, and the control state relating to ART can be shifted to ART.

  In addition, the determination value of the internal lottery of the push order replay (replay GR21 to 22), in which an additional game number of the ART is given as a benefit to the player by winning at RT2, is determined to be a win at RT1. The game state is shifted to a range in which the determination value of the push order replay (replay GR1 to 6) including the promotion replay is shifted so as not to overlap with the determination value range. The state is set to a range that does not overlap with the determination value range of the push order replay (replay GR11 to 16) including the special replay and the fall replay to be shifted, and the game state shifts by winning at RT2. Is set to a value outside the range that does not overlap with the range of judgment values for promotion replay. .

  By arranging the range of the determination value of the push order replay (replay GR21, 22) in RT2 in the out-of-range range in RT1, RT0, the play state is set to RT2, and the push order replay (replay GR21, 22) is performed again in the second lottery. Wins, both the small win and the replay wins at RT1 and RT0 are not won in the internal lottery based on the game state at the start of the game, and the push order replay (replay GR21, 22) is performed in the second lottery. Can be controlled only in accordance with the winning, so that the control regarding the added state can be simplified.

  In addition, by arranging the range of the determination value of the push order replay (replay GR21, 22) in RT2 in the out-of-range range in RT1 and RT0, the gaming state is set to RT2, and the push order replay (replay GR21, replay GR21, In the case of winning, in the internal lottery based on the game state at the start of the game, both the push order bell and the push order replay in RT1 and RT0 will not be won, and the push order replay (replay GR21) will be performed in the second lottery. , 22), the notification of the stop order notified by the sub-control unit 91 overlaps with the notification of the push order navigation based on the win of the push order bell or another push order replay. In addition, it is possible to prevent the contents of the notification from being difficult to understand, and to prevent the contents of the notification from being inconsistent.

  As described above, the embodiments and the modified examples of the present invention have been described with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments, and even if there are changes and additions without departing from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say, this is included.

  In the above-described embodiment and modified examples, an example in which the present invention is applied to a slot machine in which a bet amount is set using medals and credits as a game value has been described. The present invention may be applied to a slot machine to be set or a completely credit type slot machine to set a bet amount using only credits as a game value. When a game ball is used as a game value, for example, one medal can be made to correspond to five game balls. When the number of bets is set to 3 in the above embodiment, 15 game balls are used. This is equivalent to setting a bet amount by using this.

  Furthermore, the present invention is not limited to the use of only one of a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls. For example, a plurality of types of game values such as medals and game balls can be used together. It may be. That is, it is possible to set a bet amount and play a game by using any of a plurality of types of gaming values such as medals and game balls, and to generate a plurality of types of games such as medals and game balls by generating a prize. A slot machine that can pay out any of the utility values may be applied.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment and the modified example, the example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the gaming machine. Is an example of a pachinko game machine that plays a game by firing a game ball in the game area, for example, a liquid crystal display device having a reel in which a plurality of types of identification information are arranged on the outer periphery, etc. The control related to the transmissive display device described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a pachinko game machine in which the transmissive display device is provided on the front side (player side) of the reel. It works.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment and the modified example, the example in which the present invention is applied to the slot machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the gaming machine. It is an example of a pachinko game machine that plays a game by firing a game ball in the game area, for example, equipped with a reel having a light emitting device capable of irradiating from the back a plurality of types of identification information arranged on the outer periphery In addition, a transmissive display device such as a liquid crystal display having transparency is provided on the front side (player side) of the reel, and the light emitting device of the reel is also used in a pachinko gaming machine that also functions as a backlight of the transmissive display device. The control related to the reel LED described in the embodiment can be applied, and in this case, the same operation and effect can be obtained.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 6 MAXBET switch 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 41 Main controller 91 Sub controller

Claims (1)

A variable display unit capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified,
Deriving the display result by stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and in a slot machine capable of generating a prize according to the display result,
Lottery state control means that can be controlled to a plurality of types of lottery states including a first lottery state and a second lottery state;
Lottery means for determining the lottery result with a probability according to the type of lottery state,
Specific control execution means for executing specific control;
Specific control ending means for ending specific control;
With
The first lottery state and the second lottery state have different probabilities of determining the special lottery result,
The specific control ending means, the specific control is being executed, and in the first lottery state, the specific control is terminated based on a lottery result of the lottery means being a special lottery result,
The slot machine further includes a re-lottery unit that determines a lottery result at a probability according to the first lottery state in the second lottery state,
The specific control ending means is configured to execute the specific control based on the fact that the lottery result of the re-lottery means is a special lottery result when the specific control is being executed and the second lottery state is being controlled. To finish the slot machine.

Images